CFC-201 User's Munual

CFC-201 CONTROLLER
USERS MANUAL
Version 1
Yamato Scale Co., Ltd.

CFC-201
CFC– 201
USERS MANUAL
RECORD OF ISSUE
VERSION DATE DESCRIPTION
No. 1 February 1, 2008
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
No. 9
No. 10
YAMATO SCALE CO., LTD.

Copyright © 2007 by Yamato Scale Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without permission in
writing from the publisher.
Users Manual Ver. 1 -i- EJ1025AG0700A

PREFACE CFC-201
PREFACE
This manual provides the instructions for operation including parameter setting and
setup procedures for CFC-201.
Before performing the operation or setup, please read this manual carefully and
follow all the instructions for operation and safety to assure weighing accuracy and
performance as well as prolonged trouble-free use.
Be sure to keep this manual so that you may consult it any time you have a
question about operation of your machine.
Please also note that this manual may be partially revised time to time to improve
the machine performance or due to parts revision.
Please contact your supplier for question on this manual. If you still have problems,
please consult Yamato Japan at the address below.
Overseas Operation Department

Yamato Scale Co., Ltd.
Saenbacho 5-22, Akashi 673-8688 Japan
Phone: 81-78-918-5568
Fax: 81-78-918-5552
Users Manual Ver. 1 - ii - EJ1025AG0700A

DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION NOTICES CFC-201
DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION NOTICES
RECOGNIZE SAFETY INFORMATION
The Safety Alert Symbol brings your attention to Danger, Warning and
Caution notices, When you see this symbol be alert to the potential for
personal injury or your machine.
The careful operation of your machine depends on every one who operates,
maintains, adjusts or works near it. Please read and understand these
danger, warning and caution notices. Be sure you understand the following
signal words which will be seen throughout this manual:
DANGER Alerts you to an immediate hazard, which will always result in severe
personal injury and possible death, if it is not avoided.
WARNING
Alerts you to a hazard which will result in a serious personal injury, or
possible death in some cases, if not avoided.
CAUTION Alerts to personal hazard which may result in a serious personal injury if not
avoided. It also alerts against an unsafe practice that will permanently
damage equipment or property.
Points out a proper use that will avoid damage to the machine, could result
IMPORTANT violation against the regulations of Weights and Measures or the
prepackaging rules, or will extend life of machine parts.
Suggestion as to how to use or adjust the machine for best product results.
BASIC RECOMMENDATION
CAUTION
1. Be sure to perform operation according to the instructions described in
this manual.
WARNING 2. Maintenance and inspection work must be performed by qualified a

personnel, who has enough knowledge of both mechanical and
electrical details.
Users Manual Ver. 1 - iii - EJ1025AG0700A

DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION NOTICES CFC-201
ELECTRICAL SAFETY INFORMATION
DANGER 1. Never perform any changes of or additions to this instrument.

Changes or additional work on the instrument performed
unauthorized personal is very dangerous or cause serious failure. Be
sure to contact Yamato Japan if you require any change or additional
work.
DANGER
2. Be sure to shut down power supply when you change any boards or
parts of this instrument. It is very dangerous by electrical shock to
carry out such work while power is on.
WARNING
3. Never interrupt ventilation through the ventilation windows on the
instrument with cloth or others. This window is important to ventilation
to prevent temperature increase.
DANGER
4. Never insert your hands, any materials contains wet parts or metal
parts into this instrument. This may cause serious damage.
CAUTION NOTICES DURING INSTALLATION OR MAINTENANCE
DANGER
1. Do not locate this instrument in a combustible environment or near
any explosive substance.
DANGER 2. Be sure to ground the earth terminal of this instrument. Otherwise

electrical shock would result severe personal injury or possible death
in some case, if it not avoided.
CAUTION ABOUT DISPOSAL

WARNING
1. This instrument is using a lithium battery. Before discarding the

lithium battery, remove it from the printed circuit board, insulate one
of the + or – terminal. Discard it together with nonflammable garbage.
Do not input it to fire or do not heat it by any means.
Users Manual Ver. 1 - iv - EJ1025AG0700A

CONTENTS CFC-201
CONTENTS
Record of Issue i
Preface ii
Danger, Warning and Caution Notices iii
Contents v
Chapter-1 MACHINE DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................... 1

1.1 Front Panel Layout............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Rear Panel ......................................................................................................................... 4
Chapter-2 SETUP ........................................................................................................................ 5

2.1 Power ON........................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 How to Operate .................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Normal Display ................................................................................................................... 7
2.4 Monitor Display [1], [5] to [8].......................................................................................... 9
2.5 Weighing Setting [SET] [1] .......................................................................................... 10
2.6 Address Setting [SET] [3] ............................................................................................ 11
2.7 Set the Date and Time [SET] [8] ................................................................................. 12
2.8 Initialize Data [SET] [7] [1] and [1] to [3]...................................................................... 12
2.9 SAI Function [SET] [7] [3] [1] ....................................................................................... 13
2.10 SAT Function [SET] [7] [3] [2] ...................................................................................... 14
2.11 SBS Function [SET] [7] [3] [3] ..................................................................................... 15
Chapter-3 ADJUSTMENT.......................................................................................................... 17
3.1 Description ....................................................................................................................... 17
3.2 Zero Adjustment [SET] [4] [1] ...................................................................................... 18
3.3 Span Check with Check Weight [SET] [4] [2] .............................................................. 23
3.4 Span Adjustment [SET] [4] [3] ..................................................................................... 25
3.5 Pulse Adjustment [SET] [4] [4] .................................................................................... 30
3.6 Angle Adjustment [SET] [4] [5] .................................................................................... 32
Chapter-4 ERROR DISPLAY ..................................................................................................... 33

4.1 Error Display .................................................................................................................... 33
4.2 View the Error History [SET] [9] .................................................................................. 33
4.3 View the Version Number [SET] [5] [0]........................................................................ 34
Chapter-5 OPERATION ............................................................................................................. 35

5.1 Basic Settings .................................................................................................................. 35
5.2 Settings of the Constant Feed Weigher ........................................................................... 47
5.3 Method of Use as a Converter ......................................................................................... 59
Chapter-6 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE .................................................................................. 61

6.1 Connection of Load Cell .................................................................................................. 61
6.2 Control Input/Output......................................................................................................... 63
6.3 Input/Output for the Constant Feed Weigher................................................................... 68
6.4 Serial Input/Output ........................................................................................................... 81
6.5 Printing Data Output ........................................................................................................ 83
6.6 Communication with the Sequencer ................................................................................ 89
6.7 CFC-100 Compatible Communication ........................................................................... 105
6.8 Yamato Original Communication Format....................................................................... 112
6.9 Save and Load the Setting Values via USB .................................................................. 115
Users Manual Ver. 1 -v- EJ1025AG0700A

CONTENTS CFC-201
Chapter-7 OPTION .................................................................................................................. 118
7.1 D/A and relay output ...................................................................................................... 118
7.2 Cc-Link Interface ............................................................................................................ 120
Chapter-8 SPECIFICATION .................................................................................................... 146

8.1 Specifications ................................................................................................................. 146
8.2 OUTER VIEW ................................................................................................................ 149
8.3 Internal Configuration Drawing ...................................................................................... 149
8.4 Power Consumption Table ............................................................................................. 150
8.5 Data Label ...................................................................................................................... 150
Annex 1 - ADDRESS SETTING .................................................................................................. 167

Annex 2 - PRINTING FORMAT SETTING TABLE ..................................................................... 193
Annex 3 - ERROR CODE & TROUBLE SHOOTING ................................................................. 197
Annex 4 - INPUT/OUTPUT CONNECTORS ............................................................................... 204
Users Manual Ver. 1 - vi - EJ1025AG0700A

MACHINE DESCRIPTION CFC-201
Chapter-1 MACHINE DESCRIPTION

1.1 Front Panel Layout
Status CFC- 201
OP CLB F L S D SET
Feed rate
t/h
DEV
t/h
Message line
ｾｷｻﾝﾘｮｳ k g
Monitor display
Setting display
Operation mode selection key

P7 P8 P9
ＳＥＴＡＵＴＯ７８９
Automatic operation switch
P4 P5 P6
ＥｘＡｄｊ４５６
External setting switch
P1 P2 P3
１２３
Adjustment key P0
Ｆ１ＬＯＣＫ０ＣＥＮＴ
Lock key
(1) Status
The status is provided as below:
Status Description
OP weighing Becomes ON while the weighing is executing.
CLB calibrating Becomes ON when the adjustment operation is started.
F feed rate alarm Becomes ON when the feed rate exceeds the alarm value.
L load rate alarm Becomes ON when the load rate exceeds the alarm value.
S speed alarm Becomes ON when the belt speed exceeds the alarm value.
D deviation alarm Becomes ON when the deviation exceeds the alarm value. (*)
SET setting value alarm Becomes ON when the setting value exceeds the alarm value.
(*)
DEV deviation meter Displays deviation meter in seven stages as below. (*)
△ Blinks (ON: 1 second, OFF: 2 seconds) Excess
△ Blinks (ON: 1 second, OFF: 1 second)
△ ON
□ ON Under normal control
▽ ON
▽ Blinks (ON: 1 second, OFF: 1 second)
▽ Blinks (ON: 1 second, OFF: 2 seconds) Deficiency
(*) The display is available only when the CFW or 2-Stage Capacity Changeover type CFW is
selected.
Users Manual Ver. 1 -1- EJ1025AG0700A

(2) Keys and Switches

Key Name Function
Lock key Locks and unlocks the operation. Before operating the indicator, it
is necessary to press this key first and unlock (LED: OFF). The
ＬＯＣＫ key operation is disabled when it is locked. The indicator becomes
locked (LED: ON) when no key operation is executed for 10
minutes or more.
Operation mode Switches the mode between the Setting and the Weighing modes.
ＳＥＴ
Selection key The LED is ON in the Setting mode, and OFF during the Weighing
mode.
Automatic Switches the operation between the Automatic operation and the
ＡＵＴＯ operation Manual operation when this key is pressed during 3 seconds. The
switch key lamp turns ON during the Automatic operation.
External setting Switches the operation between the External operation and the
ＥＸ switch Internal operation when this key is pressed during 3 seconds. The
key lamp turns ON during the External operation.
Adjustment key Starts and interrupts the adjustment. The key lamp is ON during
the adjustment. The adjustment process starts when this key is
Ａｄｊ
pressed during the Adjustment mode. To interrupt the adjustment,
press this key again during the adjustment process.
Arrow keys Moves the cursor to select the items.
Adjusts the control output in the CFW mode during the Manual
operation. The control output is adjusted per 1% when it is
pressed one time and per 10% when it is pressed for more than
one second.
Monitor key / In the Weighing mode: the numbers [1] and [5] to [8] shown at the
P0
０ Numeric key upper left of the keys becomes Monitor keys.
In the Setting mode: the numbers [0] to [9] shown in the center of
to the keys becomes the numeric keys.
P9
９
Clear key Clears the setting value during the input.

Ｃ
Enter key Enters the setting.

ＥＮＴ
[F1] key Switches the setting display.

Ｆ１ During setting: inputs the negative values.
(3) Feed Rate

6 digits, 7 segments.
Displays the current feed rate. The unit of weight can be selected in the address settings.
(4) Message Line
10 digits, 5×7 dot character display.
Displays the current weighing status, setting contents, monitor display contents and errors.

Status Message Description

Weighing "Weigh Mode" Displays the contents when the
or Monitor display Monitor key is pressed during the
weighing.
"Calib" During calibration.
Setting Displays the item of the setting data.
Error Displays the contents of the error when Refer to Chapter-4 for details.
an error occurred during self-diagnosis
or sequence.
(5) Monitor Display

12 digits, 7 segments max.
Normally displays the totalized value. The numeric keys (5 to 8) display the data of the selected
item (See 2-4), but the display returns to the Integrated display after 10 minutes. When an error
occurs, the message and its code are displayed. (See Chapter-4)
(6) Setting Display
15 digits × 3 lines, 7 segments max.
Displays depending on the operation mode.
A: Conveyor scale mode B: Reclaimer mode

Sym- Number of Sym- Number of
Setting items Setting items
bols digits displayed bols digits displayed
L. Load rate 4 digits L. Load rate 4 digits
E. Moisture value 4 digits F. Angle 4 digits
P. Speed input level 3 digits E. Moisture value 4 digits
meter
P. Speed input level 3 digits
meter
C: (CFW mode) and D (2-stage changeover type CFW mode)

Sym- Number of Sym- Number of
Setting items Setting items
bols digits displayed Ｆ１ bols digits displayed
L. Load rate 4 digits L. Load rate 4 digits
S. Feed rate setting 4 digits S. Feed rate setting 4 digits
C. Control output level 3 digits switch the A. Independent setting 4 digits
meter display
P. Speed input level 3 digits d. Ratio 4 digits
meter E. Moisture 4 digits
<Level meter> Displays "□" in ten levels and its digital value on the right. When the level
meter of the control output turns ON ten "□", 20mA (or 10V) is output. The
value given on the right of the level meter indicates "%" for the control output,
and the Input frequency for the speed input.
Regarding the Operation mode

The operation mode of CFC201 is indicated by "A" to "D" shown below:
A: Conveyor scale
B: Reclaimer type conveyor scale
C: CFW (constant feed weigher)
D: 2-Stage Capacity Changeover type CFW

1.2 Rear Panel
(1) Load cell connector CON1 OP1 OP2
(4) Serial I/O connector
CN2
(5) Analog & pulse I/O
F -CN1
POWER connector
(2) Power switch (6) Parallel control

I/O connector
８７６５４３２１
CN3
AC85 ～264v
(7) Relay contact
Ｌ terminal block
(3) Terminal for Ｎ
Power Supply (8) Optional slot
ＰＥ
(1) Load cell connector (CON1)

This is a connector for load cell.
(2) Power switch (POWER)
The power is applied, when "－" is pressed.
(3) Terminal for Power Supply
This is a terminal to connect the power cable. Apply a power source of 85 to 264VAC, 50/60Hz.
"L" and "N" are terminals for AC power source, and "PE" is an earth terminal.
DANGER Be sure to ground the earth terminal. (Grounding resistance must

be below 100 W.) A qualified person who has both electrical and
mechanical knowledge must perform grounding to avoid
electrical shock, injury or death to using your instrument.
(4) Serial input/output connector (CN2)

Connects the cable for serial input and output. Three serial ports are provided.
(5) Analog pulse input/output connector (F-CN1)
Connects the cable for the input/output of analog pulse signals.
(6) Control input/output connector (CN3)
Connects the cable for control input and output.
(7) Relay contact terminal (F-CN2)
This is a terminal for relay outputs.
(8) Optional slot
Installs an optional board when available.

SETUP CFC-201
Chapter-2 SETUP
2.1 Power ON
Press the "—" end of the Power Switch located on the rear panel. The power will be supplied to
the system. Upon application of power, the screen will show the machine model code and the
program version number as "Ver. X. XX" first, and will display the currently selected Operation
Level as “Mode XXX”.
Then, the self-diagnosis will start automatically, and the system will be in the Weighing mode
after completion of self-diagnosis.
(1) Permission Levels

To prevent important parameters from being tampered by unauthorized person, the operation of
this system is divided into the following two levels. The levels can be modified at the address
99-1 of the Address Settings.
User Level:
This level limits the use to the product setting, the internal address setting of user parameters
and the initialization accumulated data.
Administrator Level:
All the operations are allowed. (The default level)
(2) Self-diagnosis items

(1) Checks if the offset voltage is available by short-circuit the input. (Offset check)
(2) Checks if the span functions properly by applying a constant voltage. (Span check)
(3) Checks the exciting voltage. (Excitation check)
(4) Checks if the cable of the load cell is connected properly. (Load cell check)
The following will be displayed when the indicator is started properly. (The self-diagnosis time is
about 15 seconds.)
OP CLB F L S D SET OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV kg DEV kg
ｔ／ｈ
t/h ｔ／ｈ
t/h
WｅｉｇｈＭｏｄｅＷｅｉｇｈＭｏｄｅ
Conveyor scale mode CFW mode
CAUTION
Note that the operation mode is returned to the weighing mode
automatically unless any key operation is executed for 10
minutes while the weighing mode is displayed.
CAUTION When an instantaneous power interruption of within 5 seconds

occurs, it is reset in approx. 5 seconds without executing any
self-diagnosis. The operation is continued thereafter from the
pre-instantaneous power interruption status.

SETUP CFC-201
2.2 How to Operate

Below is the flow of the operation in the Weighing mode.
Weighing Mode
Weigh Mode
[Ｆ１]
[ＳＥＴ]
[ENT] Weighing Setting
Opertn'Prm [SET][1]
[SET]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Select Address
GeneralPrm [SET] [SET][3]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] [ENT] Initialcalibration
Calib INIT ADJ. [SET][4][1]
[SET] [SET]
[▽] [△] [▽] [△]
[ENT] Span check
SPAN CHECK [SET] [SET][4][2]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Span calibration
SPAN ADJ. [SET] [SET][4][3]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Pulse calibration
PULSE ADJ.
[SET] [SET][4][4]
[ENT] [ENT] Standard I/O

Test [SET] STANDARD [SET] [SET][5][1]
[▽] [△]
[▽] [△] Slot-1
[ENT]
SLOT1 [SET] [SET][5][2]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Slot-2
SLOT2 [SET] [SET][5][3]
[ENT] [ENT] Select address [X][X][ENT] Create print format

PrintParam FORMAT SET [SET][6][1] [SET] Set print lot no.
[SET] [SET]
[▽] [△]
[▽] [△] [ENT] Print Format1
FMT1 PRINT [SET] [SET][6][2]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Print Format2
FMT2 PRINT [SET] [SET][6][3]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Print Format3
FMT3 PRINT
[SET] [SET][6][4]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Print Format4
FMT4 PRINT [SET][6][5]
[SET]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Print Settings
ADR PRINT [SET] [SET][6][6]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Print Printing Format
FORMAT PT [SET] [SET][6][7]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Print Error History
FORMAT ERR [SET] [SET][6][8]
[ENT] [ENT] [ENT] Initialize Totalizer

MG Setting [SET] SET INIZ [SET] IZ Totaliz [SET] [SET][7][1]
[▽] [△]
[▽] [▽] [ENT] Initialize Deviation
[△] [△]
IZ Hensa [SET] [SET][7][2]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Initialize Error History
IZ ErrHis [SET] [SET][7][3]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Initialize Print Setting
IZ PrtSet [SET] [SET][7][4]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Initialize Address Setting
IZ ParmDat [SET] [SET][7][1][5]
[ENT] [ENT] Save to USB

USB ST MNG [SET] USB SAVE [SET] [SET][7][2][1]
[▽] [△]
[▽] [ENT] Read USB memory
[△]
USB LOAD [SET] [SET][7][2][2]
[ENT] [ENT] SAI function

CHECK FUNC [SET] SAI Func [SET] [SET][7][3][1]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] SAT function
SAT Func [SET] [SET][7][3][2]
[ENT] Set Clock [▽] [△]
Clock [ENT] SBS function
[SET] [SET][8] SBS Func [SET] [SET][7][3][3]
[▽] [△]
[ENT] Select Error History No [ENT] Confirm error history
Error His [SET] [SET]
[SET][9]

SETUP CFC-201
2.3 Normal Display

The display differs depending on the operation mode. In the CFW mode, the [F1] key allows
viewing the setting values.
Conveyor scale Reclaimer type conveyor scale
OP CLB F L S D SET P1. Totalizer OP CLB F L S D SET

（12digits）
DEV kg L. Load rate DEV kg
ｔ /ｈｔ /ｈ
t/h
（ 4digits） t/h
ＷｅｉｇｈＭｏｄｅＷｅｉｇｈＭｏｄｅ
E. Moisture
（ 4digits）
P. Speed meter
（level meter
+ 3digits）
F. Angle meter
（ 4digits）
CFW Capacity 2-stage

CFW
changeover type
OP CLB F L S D SET P1. Totalizer OP CLB F L S D SET

（12digits）
DEV kg L. Load rate DEV kg
ｔ /ｈｔ /ｈ
t/h
（ 4digits） t/h
ＷｅｉｇｈＭｏｄｅＷｅｉｇｈＭｏｄｅ
S.Setting value
（ 4digits）
C.Controloutput
（level meter
+ 3digits）
P. Speed meter
（level meter
+ 3digits）
Ｆ１
A.Independent Ｆ１
setting
（ 4digits）
E. Moisture
（ 4digits）
d.Ratio setting
（ 4digits）
High-speed/Low-speed
sratus(H/L)

SETUP CFC-201
Operation mode
Symbol Contents Description (note-2)
A B C D
L. Load factor Displays the factor of the current load on the belt. ○ ○ ○ ○
P. Speed input Displays the speed input level in 10 stages with
level meter the speed input frequency on the side.
○ ○ ○ ○
S. Feed rate Displays the current feed rate setting.
setting If the moisture is dry-based, the following value is
displayed: ○ ○ ○ ○
 1  Moisture setting 
Ratio setting
Independen t setting 
100 %
A. Independent Displays the current independent setting value.
setting (*) ○ ○
C. Control output Displays the control output level in 10 stages with
level meter the % of the control output on the side.
○ ○
d. Ratio setting Displays the current ratio setting. (*)
○ ○
E. Moisture setting Displays the current moisture setting. (*)
○ ○ ○ ○
F Angle setting Displays the current angle.
○
H/L Low-speed Displays the current high-speed / low-speed
changeover changeover status. ○
(*) When the setting is executed from an external device, "_" is displayed after the symbol. The
internal setting value can be displayed by pressing the keys [SET] [1] [ENT] sequentially.
(**) The operation modes are:
"A": Conveyor scale
"B": Reclaimer type conveyor scale
"C": CFW (Constant Feed Weigher)
"D": 2-stage capacity changeover type CFW

SETUP CFC-201
2.4 Monitor Display [1], [5] to [8]

The monitor display is indicated when the corresponding numeric key is pressed.
P1
OP CLB F L S D SET 1 3 seconds after
DEV kg
ｔ /ｈ
t/h ＴｏｔａｌｋｇＷｅｉｇｈＭｏｄｅ
Monitor display Monitor display
P7 P8 P9
P4 P5 P6
ＥｘＡｄｊ．４５６
The display of the Message line returns automatically
P1 P2 P3
１２３
to "Weigh Mode" 3 seconds after,
P0
ＥＮＴ
Ｆ１ＬＯＣＫ０Ｃ
but the Monitor display "P1." under the Message line
remains until another Monitor display is selected.
Monit
or Contents Message Digits Description
Key
P1 Totalized value TOTAL 10 Displays the totalized value. (*) The unit (g, kg,
t) is displayed on the right of the message.
P5 Totalized value of PRESET 9 Displays the current value totalized by the
Pre-set counter CNT pre-set counter. The same unit as the
Totalized value is used.
P6 Totalized value REST CNT 9 Displays the remaining totalized value until the
before Pre-set pre-set weight is reached. The same unit as
counter the Totalized value is used.
P7 Time before REST TIME 6 Displays the remaining time (sec.) until the
Pre-set counter pre-set weight is reached.
P8 Deviation DEVIATION 6 Displays the deviation from the setting value.

(**)
(*) The Totalizer displays 10 digits at its default setting, but can display 12 digits maximum by
setting the unit to display. Press [SET] [7] [1] [ENT] keys sequentially to reset the Totalizer.
(**) Press [SET] [7] [2] [ENT] keys sequentially to reset the deviation.
CAUTION
When the Monitor display is not showing "P1.", the display
contents will return automatically to "P1." after 10 minutes.

SETUP CFC-201
2.5 Weighing Setting [SET] [1]
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV kg
ｔ /ｈ
t/h
Ｏｐｅｒｔｎ ’ Ｐｒｍ
Independent
setting Moisture
setting
Ratio setting
This function provides the modification of the setting values of "Independent", "Ratio" and
"Moisture" modes internally set to the CFC.
Modify the Setting Value

1. Press [SET] [1] [ENT] keys sequentially and call the screen to modify the setting value.
2. Move the blinking alphabet with [▲] and [▼] keys to the position of the setting value to
modify.
3. Press [Setting value] [ENT] keys sequentially to modify the setting value.
4. Repeat the above steps 2 and 3, and modify all the target setting values.
5. Press [SET] key three times to return to the Weighing mode.
CAUTION When the Moisture setting is not used for Conveyor and
Reclaimer modes, [SET] [1] [ENT] keys are invalid even if they
are pressed, because any of "Independent", "Ratio" and
"Moisture" is not used.
Users Manual Ver. 1 - 10 - EJ1025AG0700A

SETUP CFC-201
2.6 Address Setting [SET] [3]
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV kg
ｔ /ｈ
t/h
ＧｅｎｅｒａｌＰｒｍ
Modify the Internal Setting Value

1. Press [SET] [3] [XX] [ENT] sequentially and call the screen to modify the setting value. [XX]
is the 2-digit address number.
2. Move the blinking alphabet with [▲] and [▼] keys to the position of the setting value to
modify.
3. Press [Setting value] [ENT] keys sequentially to modify the setting value.
4. Repeat the above steps 2 and 3, and modify all the target setting values.
5. Press [SET] key three times to return to the Weighing mode.
Refer to Annex-1 "Address Setting" for details.
WARNING
A qualified person who has enough knowledge of Address
Settings must perform the above setting change. Otherwise the
expected performance may be lost
CAUTION Note that some setting values cannot be changed depending on

the current operation mode. Refer to the Annex-1 "Address
Setting" for the relation between the setting values and the
operation modes.
CAUTION The setting values that are not used are not displayed. E.g. the
settings related to the communication are not displayed if the
serial communication is not used. Refer to the display condition of
Annex-1 "Address Setting" for details.

SETUP CFC-201
2.7 Set the Date and Time [SET] [8]
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV kg
ｔ /ｈ
t/h
ＤＡＴＥ
Date
Time
Perform the setting of the date and time as follows: the date in YYMMDD format (e.g. 070401 is
April 1st, 2007) and the time in 24 hour system in HHMMSS format (e.g. 153456 is 15:34:56)
Modify the Date

1. Press [SET] [8] [YYMMDD] [ENT] keys sequentially.
2. Press [SET] key three times to return to the weighing mode.
Modify the Time

1. Press [SET] [8] [▼] [HHMMSS] [ENT] keys sequentially.
2.8 Initialize Data [SET] [7] [1] and [1] to [3]
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV kg
ｔ
t/h
/ｈ
ＥＮＴ：シ゛ッコウ
1. Press [SET] [7] [1] [X] [ENT] keys sequentially. Select [X] from below:
[1]: Initialize the totalized value.
[2]: Initialize the deviation.
[3]: Initialize the error history.

SETUP CFC-201
2.9 SAI Function [SET] [7] [3] [1]

SAI (Self Auto Inspection) function weighs the totalized value at a specific time cycle during the
operation, and calculates the statistical data like the average, range, and standard deviation to
display the operation accuracy.
Press [7] [3] [1] keys sequentially to display the SAI Function screen.
Press [Adj] key. The message line will be as the below figure. The statistical data will be
obtained by sampling the totalized value of the specified time and count. (The [Adj] lamp will
stay OFF)
OP CLB F L S D SET
The displayed contents below the message line
DEV kg
are:
ｔ
t/h
/ｈ Line 1: Monitor display
Ａｄｊ－＞ＳＴＡＲＴ Line 2: Sample number
Line 3: Sampling time
Line 4: Totalized value of the sample
(1) Monitor Display

Displays the obtained sample data (the totalized values), and the data of the total, the maximum
value, the minimum value, the range, the average value and the standard deviation. [▲] [▼]
keys or [1] to [8] keys allow switching the displayed items. When the sample data is displayed,
[ENT] key allows switching the sample number and displays the item during two seconds.
(2) Sample Number
Displays the current status of the obtained samples. Displayed on the left is the number of
obtained samples, and on the right is the setting value.
(3) Sampling Time
Displays the current elapsed time of the sampling. Displayed on the left is the current elapsed
time, and on the right is the setting time.
(4) Totalized Value of the Sample
Displays the currently obtained totalized value of the sample.

SETUP CFC-201
2.10 SAT Function [SET] [7] [3] [2]

SAT (Self Adapter Tuning) function measures the responsiveness of the feeder at the sample
operation, and calculates and displays the optimal PI operation parameter.
Press [7] [3] [2] keys sequentially to display the SAT Function screen.
OP CLB F L S D SET
The displayed contents below the message line,
DEV kg "Adj->START", are:
ｔ /ｈ
t/h
Line 1: High speed / Low speed output settings
Ａｄｊ－＞ＳＴＡＲＴ
Line 2: PI setting values
Line 3: Current feed rate (maximum capacity ratio %)
Line 4: Control output value
How to Operate
1. Set "1" (enable) to the address 99-4 of the Address Setting.
2. Press [SET] [7] [3] [2] keys sequentially.
3. Press [Adj] key and start the SAT function.
4. First adjust the low speed output. ("Lo" will blink) After confirming that the feed rate is
stabilized press [ENT] key. (The low speed adjustment is normally performed at an output
of 20%. When this value is out of the control range due to electromagnetic feeders etc,
adjust the output manually to the lower limit of the normal range with [▲] [▼] keys, and
then press [ENT] key.)
5. Next adjust the high speed output. ("Hi" will blink) After confirming that the feed rate is
stabilized press [ENT] key. (The high speed adjustment is normally performed at an output
of 80%. When this value is out of the control range, adjust the output manually to the upper
limit of the normal range with [▲] [▼] keys, and then press [ENT] key.)
6. The indicator will automatically operate in low speed and then in high speed, and will
measure the responsiveness of the feeder. The message "Adjust End" will be shown when
the measurement is completed. Set the value of "P." and "I." displayed in this timing as the
Kp parameter and the Ti parameter of the setting regarding to the operation.
7. Set "0" (disable) to the address 99-4 of the Address Setting.
DANGER
Be sure to perform the above procedures at the test operation.
WARNING
A qualified person who has enough knowledge of PI adjustment
must perform the above change. Otherwise the expected
performance may be lost.

SETUP CFC-201
2.11 SBS Function [SET] [7] [3] [3]

SBS (Self Belt Scaling) function measures the total length of the conveyor belt with switches or
photoelectric switches when the total length of the conveyor belt is long.
Press [7] [3] [3] keys sequentially to display the SBS Function screen.
OP CLB F L S D SET
The displayed contents below the message line,
DEV kg "Adj->START", are:
ｔ /ｈ
t/h Line 1: Number of measured pulse obtained by the
Ａｄｊ－＞ＳＴＡＲＴ
reference length
Line 2: Number of measured pulse obtained by the
total length
Line 3: Reference length (m)
Line 4: Total length (m)
How to Operate
1. The length of the belt is measured by reading the tapes at the reference length of the belt
with the switch installed to the setting pulse input terminal (F-CN1 SPI02). The switch
reads the tape automatically (in case of photoelectric switch) or manually.
Be sure to follow the below conditions to measure properly:

1) The reference length must be 1000 times the measured error.
2) The number of pulse corresponding to the reference length must be 1000 pulses or
more.
3) The time to pass through the reference length must be 1000 times or more the
response error. In case of photoelectric switch, the time must be 200 seconds or
more (assuming the response error is 200ms). In case of visual observation, the time
must be 500 seconds or more (assuming the response error is 500ms).
Photo sensor CFC- 201

14 Ｆ－ＣＮ１
ＤＣ１５
the sensor the reflective tapes 12
ＳＰＩ０２
11
COM1
the reference length Switch Ｆ－ＣＮ１

12
ＳＰＩ０２
11
COM1
2. The reference length (the length between the tapes) is measured. The measured length is
written in meters to the address 57-1 of the Address Settings.
3. Press [SET] [7] [3] [3] keys sequentially.
4. Start the conveyor and press the [Adj] key. The SBS operation will start. Be sure to start at
the position in front of the reference length.
5. The pulse measurement of the reference length starts when the first tape is detected.
When the second tape is detected, the pulse measurement of the reference length ends.
And then the pulse measurement of the total length begins. (In case of switch, the switch
must be press once when the tape has passed through)

SETUP CFC-201
6. When the tape of the start position is detected, the message "CheckEnd" is displayed, and
the total length of the belt is displayed on the right of "ALL".
The adjustment is interrupted when [SET] key is pressed during the adjustment. Press [Adj] key to
restart. Perform the measurement of length several times and use the average value as the reference
length.
WARNING
A qualified person who has enough knowledge of this adjustment
must perform the above measurement of length. Otherwise the
expected weighing accuracy may be lost.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
Chapter-3 ADJUSTMENT
3.1 Description
Five types of adjustments are provided as below:
Zero Adjustment Stores to the memory the status without load on the belt.
a) In the Reclaimer mode, refer to the section 3-2-2.
b) In the 2-Stage Changeover mode, refer to the section 3-2-3.
Span Check with Checks the span accuracy of the conveyor scale with a check weight.
Check Weight a) In the 2-Stage Changeover mode, refer to the section 3-3-2.
Span Adjustment Performs the span adjustment using a test chain.
a) In the Reclaimer mode, refer to 3-4-2.
b) In the 2-Stage Changeover mode, refer to 3-4-3.
Pulse Adjustment Measures the pre-set pulse used during the adjustment operation.
a) In the 2-Stage Changeover mode, refer to 3-5-2.
Angle Adjustment Adjust the sensitivity of the angle input. This adjustment is available only
in the Reclaimer mode. Refer to 3-6.
Follow the below procedures when the adjustment is performed for the first time after
completing the installation of the conveyor:
1) Perform the Pulse Adjustment of the preset pulse. (Refer to 3-5).

2) Perform the Angle Adjustment (only when the mode is the Reclaimer mode. Refer to 3-6).
3) Perform the Zero Adjustment (Refer to 3-2)
･ Perform the initial adjustment if it is the first adjustment.
･ For the Reclaimer mode, perform the Fine Adjustment.
4) Perform the Span Adjustment (Refer to 3-4)
･ For the Reclaimer mode, perform the Fine Adjustment.
5) Perform the Span Check (Refer to 3-3)
･ Input the reference value since the reference value is not set in the default state.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
3.2 Zero Adjustment [SET] [4] [1]

3.2.1 Basic Operation for Zero Adjustment
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV kg
Difference between
t/h
Load rate (%) ＺＥＲＯＡＤＪ the previous value (%)
Initial adjustment
Estimated
value
end time(sec)
Totalizer
for adjustment
The Zero Adjustment function stores to the memory the status of no-load on the belt.
This function consists of two types: the "One-Touch Zero Adjustment" and the "Initial
Adjustment". Usually, perform the One-Touch Zero Adjustment. The Initial Adjustment is
performed when no adjustment has been performed after installation of the equipment or when
the zero point is found to be greatly fluctuated.
Prepare the Adjustment

1) Press [SET] [4] [1] keys sequentially.
2) Confirm that nothing is on the belt. And then start the conveyor.
3) After the belt speed has become stabilized, press the [Adj] key.
To interrupt the adjustment, press this key again.
4) When the target pulse is input, the adjustment weighing is terminated. The message "Z
RANGE OK" is displayed if the adjustment result is within the desired adjustment range
(under 3%), and otherwise the message "RANGE OVER" will be displayed.
One-Touch Zero Adjustment

1) The One-Touch Zero Adjustment is available when the message "Z RANGE OK” is
displayed after completing the above steps, "Prepare the Adjustment".
When the message "RANGE OVER" is displayed, check if there is no failure in the load
cell or the conveyor scale. Perform the Initial Adjustment if no failure is found.
2) If the [ENT] key is pressed when the message "Z RANGE OK" is displayed, the One-Touch
Zero adjustment is executed, and the adjustment result is written to the memory.
3) After the adjustment result has been written, the message "Adjust End" is displayed.
4) Press [SET] key three times, to return to the weighing mode.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
Initial Adjustment
1) When the [C] key is pressed after completing the above steps, "Prepare the Adjustment",
the word "Init" on the display blinks for 5 seconds.
2) When the [ENT] is pressed during this period of time, the Initial Adjustment is executed,
and the adjustment result is written to the memory.
3) The message "Good" is displayed when the writing process is completed properly, and the
message "No good" is displayed when it is failed.
4) Press [SET] key three times to return to the weighing mode.
DANGER
The message "No good" is displayed during the adjustment
when there must be troubles in the internal memory. Please
contact us in such a case.
Adjustment of the Load Rate during Zero Adjustment

1) When the [▼] key is pressed before pressing [Adj] key, the message "Load Base" is
displayed on the screen.
2) Put on the belt a weighing material with a known load rate. Input the load rate and press
[ENT] key, and the adjustment of the load rate starts. After the adjustment, press [▼] key
to return to the previous state.
3.2.2 Zero Adjustment in the Reclaimer Mode

(1) Description
When the equipment is used in the Reclaimer mode, two types of zero adjustment are available:
the Coarse Adjustment and the Fine Adjustment.
Coarse The adjustment is performed to measure the current status of the

conveyor (adhesion of weighing material, etc.).
Adjustment The adjustment is performed in accordance with the reference angle of
the conveyor (level, or another angle which is most frequently used).
This adjustment includes the Initial Adjustment and the One-Touch Zero
Adjustment.
Fine Adjustment The adjustment is performed to measure the compensation rate of the
zero point fluctuation depending on the conveyor angle.
The adjustment is performed per each angle set with the Angle
Adjustment.
This adjustment includes only the Initial Adjustment. The "One-Touch
Zero Adjustment" is not provided in the Fine Adjustment.
Perform this adjustment only when the conveyor is installed for first time
or when the zero point is found to be greatly fluctuated.
The Coarse Adjustment is performed when the address 20-6 of the Address Setting is set to "0".
The Fine Adjustment is performed when it is set to "1".
CAUTION
Be sure to perform the Angle Adjustment before performing the
Zero Adjustment in the Reclaimer mode. Refer to "3-6 Angle
Adjustment" for details.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
(2) Coarse Adjustment
（When [F1] is ON）

OP CLB F L S D SET
Load rate(%) DEV Difference between

kg
t/h
Estimated end ＺＥＲＯＡＤＪ the previous value(%)

time(sec)
(internal setting of) Initial Adjustment
the Adjustment angle value
Adjustment result
Current angle (expected value)
Perform the Fine Adjustment if it is the first adjustment after the installation of the conveyor.
1) Set "0" (Coarse Adjustment) to the address 20-6 of the Address Setting.
2) Press [SET] key three times to display in the Weighing mode, and press [SET] [4] [1] keys
sequentially to call the Zero Adjustment screen.
3) When the [F1] key is pressed, the lamp of the key becomes ON. The current angle and the
setting values of the zero point compensation for each angle are displayed. Confirm that
"_" is displayed on the left. If a number is displayed on the left instead of "_", the
adjustment currently selected is the "Fine adjustment", so follow the procedure 1) above to
check if the value set to the address setting is set to "0".
4) Adjust to the conveyor adjustment angle. When the conveyor angle is within the adjustment
range of the address 22-5 of the Address Setting, "_" on the left will be flickering. After
confirming that "_" is flickering, press the [F1] key and turn it OFF.
5) Follow the procedures of the "Basic Operation for Zero Adjustment" (Prepare the
Adjustment, One-Touch Zero Adjustment and/or Initial Adjustment).
By pressing the [F1] key, the display of the two lines on the bottom of the screen can be
switched between a) the totalizer for the adjustment, and b) the angle and the (expected)
adjustment result. The angle and the (expected) adjustment result can be confirmed during the
operation by pressing the [F1] key.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
(3) Fine Adjustment
（When [F1] is ON）

OP CLB F L S D SET
Load rate(%)
DEV kg
Difference between
t/h
Estimated end ＺＥＲＯＡＤＪ the previous value (%)

time(sec)
(internal setting of the) Initial adjustment
Adjustment angle value
Adjustment result
Current angle (expected value)
CAUTION
Perform this adjustment only when the conveyor is installed for
first time or when the zero point is found to be greatly fluctuated.
Perform the Coarse Adjustment for normal zero adjustment.

1) Set "1" (Fine Adjustment) to the address 20-6 of the Address Setting.
2) Press [SET] key three times to display the Weighing mode, and press [SET] [4] [1] keys
sequentially to call the Zero Adjustment screen.
setting values of the zero point compensation for each angle are displayed. Confirm that a
number is displayed on the left. If "_" is displayed on the left instead of a number,
the adjustment currently selected is the "Coarse Adjustment", so follow the procedure 1)
above to check if the value set to the address setting is set to "1".
Zero Adjustments
1) Perform the "Prepare the Adjustment” if it is not yet performed.
2) First perform the adjustment with the reference angle as follows.
Press the [F1] key and turn ON its key lamp. Increase or decrease the number displayed
on the left using the [▲] and [▼] keys until the "_" symbol is displayed to the number of the
reference angle.
3) Adjust the conveyor to the adjustment angle. If the conveyor angle is within the adjustment
range, the number on the left will blink. After checking that the number is blinking, press the
[F1] key to turn OFF its key lamp. The angle and the (expected) adjustment result can be
confirmed during the operation by pressing the [F1] key.
4) Confirm that nothing is on the belt. And then start the conveyor.
6) When the target pulse is input, the adjustment weighing is terminated, and the message
"Adjust End" is displayed.
7) Press [C] key, and the word "Init" on the display will blink for 5 seconds.
8) When the [ENT] is pressed during this period of time, the Adjustment is executed.
9) The message "Good" is displayed when the adjustment process is completed properly, and
the message "No good" is displayed when it is failed.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
10) The Fine Adjustment must be performed to all the adjustment angles set to the addresses
21-1 to 22-4 of the Address Settings. Press the [F1] key, turn ON its key lamp, and
increase or decrease the number displayed on the left using the [▲] and [▼] keys to
select and perform the Initial Adjustment of the other angles.
3.2.3 Zero Adjustment in the 2-Stage Changeover Mode

In the 2-Stage Changeover mode, it is necessary to perform the zero adjustment for both the
high-speed and the low-speed.
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV Difference between

kg
the previous value (%)

t/h
Load rate (%) ＺＥＲＯＡＤＪ
Initial adjustment value

Estimated end Totalizer for adjustment
time (sec)
The adjustment procedures for the Initial Adjustment and the One-Touch Zero Adjustment are
both the same as the ordinary zero adjustment. First, perform the adjustment at high-speed, and
then at low-speed. Refer to 3-2-1.
CAUTION Adjustment of the control output during the adjustment in the CFC
and 2-Stage Changeover modes:
The conveyor speed can be adjusted using the [▲] and [▼] keys
after having pressed the [F1] key and turned ON its key lamp.
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV kg
t/h/ｈ
ｔ
ＳＰＡＮＣＨＥＣＫ

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
3.3 Span Check with Check Weight [SET] [4] [2]

3.3.1 Basic Operation of Span Check with Check Weight
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV kg
Difference between
Load rate (%) t/h
Reference check weight

Estimated end value
time (sec)
Totalizer for adjustment
The Span Check with Check Weight is the check of the span accuracy of the conveyor scale
using a control weight. Perform this check regularly, and if the span is found to be greatly
deviated, perform the span adjustment using the test chain.
sequentially to call the Span Check with Check Weight screen.
"Check End" is displayed. If the error between the last adjustment is excessive, perform
first the Span Adjustment, then this Span Check with Check Weight. After these
procedures, set the reference value following the below procedures.
4) Press [C] key, and the letter "C" on the display will blink for 5 seconds.
5) The reference value is written when the [ENT] is pressed during this period of time.
6) The message "Good" is displayed when the adjustment process is completed properly, and
the message "No good" is displayed when it is failed.
CAUTION How to lift up and down the check weight:

Press the [ENT] key when the address 05-2 of the Address
Settings is set to "1" or "2", that is to say, the check weight is
controlled with pulse.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
3.3.2 Span Check with Check Weight in the 2-Stage Changeover Mode
In the 2-Stage Changeover mode, it is necessary to perform the Span Check with Check Weight
for both the high-speed and the low-speed. First, perform the adjustment at high-speed, and
then at low-speed.
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV Difference between

kg
Load rate (%) t/h

Estimated end
time (sec) Reference value

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
3.4 Span Adjustment [SET] [4] [3]

3.4.1 Basic Operation of Span Adjustment
Load rate (%)
The reference value
OP CLB F L S D SET is displayed first.
CAL: span base value
DEV kg CAL1: weight per unit length
t/h (weight/m)
The estimated time ＳＰＡＮＡＤＪ CAL2: length of belt (m)
and the value CAL3: number of revolutions
compared with the LSPAN: load rate
previous one is adjustment value
displayed after the
start of the adjustment Span value
sequentially to call the Span Adjustment screen.
2) Put the test chain on the conveyor.
3) To modify the span base value, the weight per unit length, the belt length, the number of
revolutions, etc., press the [▲] and [▼] keys to display the settings, and input new setting
values (refer to the next section "Modify the Base Value"). The span base value can also
be modified by setting the reference value to the address 07-2 of the Address Settings.
4) Start the conveyor. After the belt speed has become stabilized, press the [Adj] key.
6) Press [C] key, and the word "SPAN" on the display will blink for 5 seconds.
7) The Span Adjustment starts when the [ENT] is pressed during this period of time.
8) The message "Good" is displayed when the adjustment process has completed properly,
and the message "No good" is displayed when it has failed.
CAUTION
The message "No good" is displayed during the adjustment when
there must be troubles in the internal memory. Please contact us
in such a case.
Modify the Base Value

1. The Span Adjustment screen displays the message “CAL. xxxxxx” which indicates the span
base value currently set in the Address Settings. The span coefficient is calculated so that the
weight after the Span Adjustment becomes this value.
Press [▼] key and blink the word “CAL” on the display to input and modify the span base
value.
The value to input as span base value is not in the unit of the totalizer that is displayed but in
the unit 1000 times the internal totalizer.
Press the [Adj] key in this state and begin the adjustment.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
2. When the weight per unit length, the belt length and the integral number of revolutions are
known values, they can be input directly and automatically as base value.
During the blinking of “CAL”, the display changes from “CAL1” to “CAL3” every time [▼] key is
pressed.
Display Contents Precautions for Setting Values
CAL1 Weight per unit length Set the weight in the unit of 1/10 of the span
base value.
CAL2 Belt length Set the belt length in millimeters.
CAL3 Integral number of revolutions Set the number of revolutions of the belt
during the span adjustment.
The base value is calculated by entering the setting value while each of the above is displayed.
To start the adjustment, press the [▲] and [▼] keys several times, display to “CAL” on the
screen and check if the span base value has been modified before pressing the [Adj] key.
CAUTION Note that the span base value is not re-calculated even if the
address 09-1 to 09-3 of the Address Settings (“Number of
revolutions”, “Belt length” and “Weight per unit length”) are
directly modified.
Span Adjustment of Load Rate

The Load Rate Span can be automatically adjusted at the Span Adjustment screen.
When [▼] key is pressed while “CAL3” is displayed, the “LSPAn” display will blink.
During this blink, enter the load rate of the test chain up to 2 digits after the decimal point. The
current load of the test chain will be displayed as load rate.
Span Adjustment at Actual Weight
CAUTION
Follow the below procedures when the span adjustment is
available at actual weight.
1) Press [SET] key three times and display the Weighing mode.
Check that the [SET] key lamp is turned OFF. If it is not OFF, press the [SET] key several
times to select the Weighing mode.
2) Set the Moisture setting to “0”.
The moisture setting has to be set to “0” when the moisture setting is used.
3) Reset the totalized value by pressing [SET] [7] [1] [ENT] keys sequentially.
Then, press the [SET] key three times to return to the Weighing mode.
4) Start the weighing.
Start feeding the weighing material on the conveyor.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
5) Calculate and set the span value.
After having flown all the weighing materials, record the value displayed by the totalizer,
and perform the following calculation to obtain the value to set to the address 08-2 of the
Address Settings to modify the span coefficient.
totalized value  old span coefficient

New span coefficient 
actual weight value
3.4.2 Span Adjustment in the Reclaimer Mode

(1) Description
When the equipment is used in the Reclaimer mode, two types of span adjustment are
available: the Coarse Adjustment and the Fine Adjustment.
Coarse In the ordinary case, perform this adjustment. Perform the adjustment
with the reference angle of conveyor (level, or with the angle which is the
Adjustment most frequently used).
Fine Adjustment This adjustment is performed to measure the compensation rate of the
span fluctuation depending on the angle of the conveyor.
The adjustment is performed at each adjustment angle set to the
address 23-1 to 24-4 of the Address Settings.
Performed this adjustment only when it is the first adjustment after the
installation of the conveyor or when the span value is greatly fluctuated.
When the span is fluctuated due to adhesion of weighing material, etc.,
perform the Coarse Adjustment.
The Coarse Adjustment is performed when the address 20-6 of the Address Setting is set to "0".
The Fine Adjustment is performed when it is set to "1".
CAUTION
Be sure to perform the Angle Adjustment before performing the
Span Adjustment in the Reclaimer mode. Refer to "3-6 Angle
Adjustment" for details.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
(2) Coarse Adjustment
（When [F1] is ON） OP CLB F L S D SET
Load rate (%) DEV Ratio compared with

kg
t/h
ＳＰＡＮＡＤＪ
Estimated end
time (sec)
Span compensation
value
Adjustment angle
Estimated
Current angle adjustment result
Perform the Fine Adjustment if it is the first adjustment after the installation of the conveyor.
1) Set "0" (Coarse Adjustment) to the address 20-6 of the Address Setting.
2) Press [SET] key three times to display in the Weighing mode, and press [SET] [4] [3] keys
3) Set the test chain on the conveyor.
setting values of the span compensation for each angle are displayed. Confirm that "_" is
displayed on the left. If a number is displayed on the left instead of "_", the
adjustment currently selected is the "Fine adjustment", so follow the procedure 1) above to
check if the value set to the address setting is set to "0".
5) Adjust to the conveyor adjustment angle. When the conveyor angle is within the adjustment
range of the address 22-5 of the Address Setting, "_" on the left will be flickering. After
confirming that "_" is flickering, press the [F1] key and turn it OFF.
6) Follow the procedures of the "3.4.1. Basic Operation of Span Adjustment".
By pressing the [F1] key, the display of the two lines on the bottom of the screen can be
switched to the angle and the (expected) adjustment result.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
(3) Fine Adjustment

Perform this adjustment only when the conveyor is installed for first time or when the zero point
is found to be greatly fluctuated. Perform the Coarse Adjustment for normal span adjustment.

1) Set "1" (Fine Adjustment) to the address 20-6 of the Address Setting.
3) Set the test chain on the conveyor.
setting values of the span compensation for each angle are displayed. Confirm that a
number is displayed on the left. If "_" is displayed on the left instead of a number,
the adjustment currently selected is the "Coarse Adjustment", so follow the procedure 1)
above to check if the value set to the address setting is set to "1".
Span Adjustment
1) Perform the "Prepare the Adjustment” if it is not yet performed.
2) First perform the adjustment with the reference angle as follows.
Press the [F1] key and turn ON its key lamp. Increase or decrease the number displayed
on the left using the [▲] and [▼] keys until the "_" symbol is displayed to the number of the
reference angle.
3) Adjust the conveyor to the adjustment angle. If the conveyor angle is within the adjustment
range, the number on the left will blink. After checking that the number is blinking, press the
[F1] key to turn OFF its key lamp. The angle and the (expected) adjustment result can be
confirmed during the operation by pressing the [F1] key.
4) Perform the procedure of the ordinary Span Adjustment. Refer to "3.4.1. Basic Operation of
Span Adjustment".
5) The Fine Adjustment must be performed to all the adjustment angles set to the addresses
21-1 to 22-4 of the Address Settings. Press the [F1] key, turn ON its key lamp, and
increase or decrease the number displayed on the left using the [▲] and [▼] keys to select
and perform the Initial Adjustment of the other angles.
3.4.3 Span Adjustment in the 2-Stage Changeover Mode

In the 2-Stage Changeover mode, it is necessary to perform the Span Check with Check Weight
for both the high-speed and the low-speed. First, perform the adjustment at high-speed, and
then at low-speed.
The reference value
Load rate (%) is displayed first.
OP CLB F L S D SET
CAL:span base value
CAL1: weight per unit length
(weight/m)
DEV kg
The estimated time t/h

CAL2: lengthof belt (m)
and the value ＳＰＡＮＡＤＪ CAL3: number of revolutions
compared with LSPAN: Load rate
the previous one adjustment value
is displayed after
the start of Span adjustment value
the adjustment. High speed/Low speed

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
3.5 Pulse Adjustment [SET] [4] [4]

3.5.1 Basic Operation of Pulse Adjustment
OP CLB F L S D SET
kg
DEV
Load rate (%) t/h
ＰＵＬＳＥＡＤＪ
Expected Adjustment
end time (sec) accuracy
Current base pulse Current number of

pulses measured
This function measures the base pulse used during the adjustment operation. The number of
pulses when the belt rotated an integral number of counts is counted.

1) Set the switch to the speed detector.
2) Mark the conveyor.
During the adjustment, turn ON the switch when the mark on the conveyor has come, and
turn it OFF after the belt has rotated an integral number of counts.
Pulse Adjustment
sequentially to call the Pulse Adjustment screen.
2) Press the [Adj] key. The key lamp will turn ON. To interrupt the adjustment, press this key
again.
3) To adjust, turn ON the switch when the mark on the conveyor has come and turn it OFF
after the belt has made an integral number of rotations.
4) Press the [Adj] key after turning off the switch. The key lamp will be OFF, and the message
5) Press the [C] key, and the letter "H" will blinks on the display for 5 seconds.
6) Press the [ENT] key while "H" is blinking to write the number of pulses.
7) The message "Good" is displayed when the writing process has completed properly.

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
3.5.2 Pulse Adjustment in the 2-Stage Changeover Mode
In the 2-Stage Changeover mode, it is necessary to perform the Pulse Adjustment for both the
high-speed and the low-speed. First, perform the adjustment at high-speed, and then at
low-speed. Perform the adjustment as the normal Pulse Adjustment. Refer to 3.5.1 for details.
OP CLB F L S D SET
kg
DEV
Load rate (%) t/h
ＰＵＬＳＥＡＤＪ Adjustment

Expected accuracy
end time (sec)
Current number of
Current base pulse pulse measured
High speed/
Low speed

ADJUSTMENT CFC-201
3.6 Angle Adjustment [SET] [4] [5]
CAUTION Be sure to perform the Angle Adjustment ONLY IN THE

RECLAIMER MODE. In the Reclaimer mode, it is necessary that
the Angle Adjustment has been completed before the Zero and
Span adjustments. Accuracy of measurement cannot be obtained
before the completion of Angle Adjustment.
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV Reference angle

kg
input 1
t/h
Reference ＧＲＡＤ１
angle 1
Reference angle
Reference input 2
angle 2
Current input
Current angle value
sequentially to call the Angle Adjustment screen.
2 Three lines are displayed on the screen. The first line is used to input the minimum
conveyor angle setting, the second line is to input the maximum angle setting, and the third
line is indicating the current angle input status. Press the [▲] and [▼] keys to switch the
display of the item to perform the setting (the first line and the second line). The number of
the item ready to be set will blink on the screen. Press the numeric keys as follows to input
the angle.
3) First press the cursor keys ([▲] and [▼]) to blink the number "1." and input the minimum
angle of the conveyor. Press the [ENT] key and the input number is written on the left of
the first line.
4) Press the [Adj] key at the minimum angle status, and the current input value written on the
right of the first line.
5) Press the cursor keys ([▲] and [▼]) to blink the number "2." and input the maximum angle
of the conveyor. Press the [ENT] key and the input number is written on the left of the
second line.
6) Press the [Adj] key at the maximum angle status, and the current input value written on the
right of the second line.
7) The conveyor angle adjustment is completed. Change the conveyor angle, to check if the
current angle displayed on the third line is correct.
8) To perform the Zero and Span adjustments, it is necessary to perform the following in
advance: a) write the adjustment angles in the Address Settings, b) set the conveyor angle
to the angle to adjust, c) note down the current angle displayed on the left of the third line,
d) and set it to the Address Settings.

ERROR DISPLAY CFC-201
Chapter-4 ERROR DISPLAY

4.1 Error Display
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV kg
t/h
ＮＯＫＥＹＯＰ
Error message line
Error code (4 dgts)

Error serial number (1 dgt)
Sub error code (2 dgts)
The error is displayed as the above figure. The screen returns to the normal display by pressing
the [C] key, but returns to the error display if the cause of the error has not been eliminated after
one minute. The error serial number indicates where the error has occurred. Refer to ANNEX-3
"Error Codes Table" for details.
4.2 View the Error History [SET] [9]
OP CLB F L S D SET Error history number
DEV kg
Error code,
t/h error serial number,
sub error code,and
error level
Time of error
Time of Recovery
from error
View the Error History

1) Press [SET] [9] keys sequentially to view the error history.
View the Other Error History

1) After having pressed [SET] [9] keys sequentially, press [▲] or [▼] key.
2) To view by specifying directly the number of the error history, press [X] [X] [ENT] keys,
where [X] [X] are the 2-digit error history number.
Clear the Error History

1) Press [SET] [7] [3] keys and the error history is cleared.

ERROR DISPLAY CFC-201
4.3 View the Version Number [SET] [5] [0]

1) Press [SET] [5] [0] keys to view the program version and the model name of the built-in
board.
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV
t/h
t/h
Ｖｅｒ．１．００

OPERATION CFC-201
Chapter-5 OPERATION
5.1 Basic Settings
The basic settings have to be modified before the adjustment.
(1) Set the Permission Level and the Operator Mode
1) Set the Permission Level

This function allows limiting the scope to operate the system and to modify the Address
Settings.
Address Permission Level (0 to 1) Default: 1

Setting Set the permission level of operation.
99-1 0: user level 1: administrator level
Address Write Permission (1 to 2) Default: 2
Setting Set the write permission during the operation
99-2 1: browse 2: browse and write
By setting the above parameters, the scope of operation can be modified as below:
Permission Write Weighing Address Adjustments Tests Printing Initialize Time Error
level permission setting setting history
(address (address
[SET] [1] [SET] [3] [SET] [4] [SET] [5] [SET] [6] [SET] [7] [SET] [8] [SET] [9]
99-1) 99-2)
user browse ○ ○ × × × × × ×
browse & write ○ ○ × × × × × ×
administrator browse ○ ○ × × ○ × × ○
browse & write ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The parameters that are able to modify will also be limited. At the user level, the values
concerning to the alarm can be modified, but the most of the values of the Address Settings are
not allowed modifying or specifying.
2) Set the Operator Mode

The Operator can be selected from one of the five below:
Address Operator (0 to 4) Default: 2

Setting Select the operator to use. To fix the setting, the power source has to be turned OFF
99-6 once before use.
0: conveyor scale (A)
The flow rate and the totalized value of the weighing material fed on the conveyor
are measured with the load cells and the speed detector set on the conveyor.
1: reclaimer type conveyor scale (B)
The flow rate and the totalized value are measured with accuracy by compensating
the error due to the inclination of the conveyor. The compensation is performed with
a detector checking the angle of the conveyor used by the reclaimer and the stacker.
2: constant feed weigher (C)
The speed of the conveyor is controlled so that the weighed flow rate is the same as
the value set as the flow rate.
3: 2-stage capacity changeover type constant feed weigher (D)
This operator is used for the constant feed weigher having the function to switch its
capacity in two stages to allow controlling in a wide range.
4: converter (D)
This operator converts the output of the load cells to 4-20mA.

OPERATION CFC-201
(2) Set the Units
1) Set the Unit System of the Feed Rate

This function allows setting the unit of the feed rate.
Address Unit (0 to 5) Default: 5

Setting Set the unit of the feed rate.
00-1 0: g/min 1: kg/min 2: t/min 3: g/h 4: kg/h 5: t/h
Address Decimal Point (1 to 3) Default: 1
Setting Set the position of the decimal point.
00-2 0: 0000. 1: 000.0 2: 00.00 3: 0.000
Address Scale Interval (0 to 7) Default: 2
Setting Set the scale interval of the feed rate.
00-3 0: 1 1: 2 2: 5 3: 10 4: 20 5: 50 6: 100 7: 200
Address Maximum Capacity (1 to 99999) Default: 120.0
Setting Set the maximum capacity.
00-4
Set the average value when the display of the feed rate value fluctuates. Obtain the fluctuating
time cycle and set more than three times this time cycle as the average value. The average of
the feed rate will only give an effect to the display of the feed rated and will not act upon the
internal weighing process and control.
The feed rate is updated every 200ms. However the feed rate can be displayed and output in a
fixed state by obtaining the average value of the feed rate per the setting period of time if
frequent variation of the feed rate is not needed.
Address Average Time (0 to 1000) Default: 2.0

Setting Set the average time of the feed rate in the unit of 0.1 second.
01-4
Address Update Interval of Average (0 to 3600) Default: 0
Setting Set the update time interval (in second) to calculate the average of the feed rate, when
01-6 the feed rate varying per the update time is used.
Address Feed Rate Display (0 to 1) Default: 0
Setting Switch the display between the feed rate and the feed rate varying per the update time.
05-3 0: feed rate 1: feed rate varying per the update time
The below figure is the difference between each kind of feed rates (without average time, with
average time of 12 seconds, and varying per the update time of 20 seconds).
80.0
70.0 Feed rate (average time: 12 seconds)

Feed rate without average
60.0
Feed rate updated per specified time
(20 seconds)
Feed Rate [t/h]
50.0
40.0
30.0
20.0
10.0
0.0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Elapsed time [second]

OPERATION CFC-201
The feed rate without average time has a quick response but it fluctuates. The feed rate with
average time does not fluctuate after the average time but has a delay of 12 seconds when the
average time is set to 12 seconds.
Note that the feed rate alarm is detecting the feed rate after the average time and the longer the
average time is set the longer the output of the alarm will delay.
The feed rate varying per the specified update time obtains the average value of the feed rate
before the average time which is within the specified time, and updates per the specified time.
Use this function when it is better to update the feed rate gradually.
2) Set the Unit, the Decimal Point and the Scale Interval of the Totalizer
The unit of the totalizer can be set as follows:
Address Unit (0 to 2) Default: 1

Setting Set the unit of the totalizer.
02-1 0: g 1: kg 2: t
Address Decimal Point (0 to 3) Default: 0
Setting Set the position of the decimal point of the totalizer.
02-2 0: 0000. 1: 000.0 2: 00.00 3: 0.000
Address Scale Interval (0 to 7) Default: 3
Setting Set the scale interval of the totalizer.
02-3 0: 1 1: 2 2: 5 3: 10 4: 20 5: 50 6: 100 7: 200
Address Internal Unit (0 to 2) Default: 1
Setting Set the weight unit used internally.
02-4 0: g 1: kg 2: t
Address Internal Decimal Point (3 to 6) Default: 4
Setting Set the position of the decimal point used internally.
02-5 3: 0.000 4: 0.0000 5: 0.00000 6: 0.000000
To set the internal unit manually from the maximum capacity (when "0: manual" has been set to
the address 02-6 of the Address Settings), use the reference table below:
Maximum Capacity Maximum Capacity Internal Unit Internal Decimal Point

Weight/h Weight/min (set to address 02-4) (set to address 02-5)
3600 t to 36000 t 60 t to 600 t t (2) 5
360 t to 3600 t 6 t to 60 t kg (1) 3
36 t to 360 t 600 kg to 6 t kg (1) 4
3.6 t to 36 t 60 kg to 600 kg kg (1) 5
360 kg to 3.6 t 6 kg to 60 kg g (0) 3
36 kg to 360 kg 600 g to 6 kg g (0) 4
3.6 kg to 36 kg 60 g to 600 g g (0) 5
0.36 kg to 3.6 kg 6 g to 60 g g (0) 6
Note that the internal unit will be set automatically when "1: automatic" is set to the address
02-6.
3) Set the Load Rate

Set the average time of the load rate to the address 03-4 of the Address Settings if the display
of the load rate fluctuates due to irregularities in the conveyor belt. Note that the average time of
the load rate affects the internal process of weighing and control. It may cause time delays if a
large value is set to the Constant Feed Weigher. Set more than three times this fluctuating time
cycle as the average value.
The Load Rate Span (of the address 03-5 of the Address Settings) is the sensitivity of the
display of the load rate. The AD converted value is 400,000 counts (13,333 counts/mV) when
30mV (and 10V as sensing voltage) is applied as signal from the load cell.

OPERATION CFC-201
The feed rate becomes zero if the operation is assumed to be Zero Operation, VIZ executed at
zero, when the load rate continues to be below the value set as Near Zero (address 03-6 of the
Address Settings) during 3 seconds. If the load rate becomes over the value set as Near Zero
during 1 second or more, the Zero Operation is released and the feed rate is calculated.
Address Average Time (0 to 1000) Default: 0

Setting Set the average time of the load rate in 0.1 second unit.
03-4
Address Load Rate Span (0 to 999999) Default: 133333
Setting Set the sensitivity of the display of the load rate. Put the test chain on the conveyor belt
03-5 near 100% after zero adjustment, and set the value so that the load value is the value of
the test chain.
D  B  C   A
(where A% is the test chain value, B% is the load current value, C% is the current value
set to this address, D% is the new value to set to this address)
The value set to this address will be approximately equal to:
span input voltagemV   13333
Address Near Zero (0 to 999) Default: 0.0

Setting Set the lowest limit value of the load rate to interrupt the totalizing process. The
03-6 totalizing process will stop when the load rate becomes equal or below the value set
here.
4) Set the Speed

The speed indicator will display "100%" when the input of the speed pulse becomes equal to the
frequency set to Rated Frequency (of the address 06-4 of the Address Settings).
When the system is used as conveyor scale, a fixed pulse of 100Hz can be output by setting "1:
internal pulse (100Hz)" to the address 06-5 even if there is no speed signal.
To perform control simulations of the Constant Feed Weigher, the number of pulses can be
modified internally (set the address 06-5 to "2") relating to the current control output, and it is
also possible to receive only external speed pulse input as pulse signals and use only the
control functions of the Constant Feed Weigher (by setting the address 06-5 to "3").
Address Rated Frequency (0 to 499) Default: 250

Setting Set the rated input frequency in Hz. The value set here will be the reference value of
06-4 100% of the speed input level indicator.
Speed Input Mode (0 to 3) Default: 0
Address Select the speed input to use.
Setting 0: speed signal 1: internal pulse (100Hz)
06-5 2: pulse proportional to the current control output (100Hz at 100%)
3: use as totalized pulse input
(3) Set the Alarm Value and the Operation Timer
1) Set the Alarm Value

The threshold value and the timer (in 0.1 second unit) of the upper and lower limits alarms can
be set for the feed rate, the load rate and the speed. The alarm is output when the value set to
each alarm has been exceeded during the time set as the timer. The alarm is reset if the state
continues to be within the value set to each alarm during the time set as the timer. The setting of
each alarm is performed as below:

OPERATION CFC-201
Address to Set the

Alarm Item Default Value
Parameter
Feed rate Upper limit alarm 01-1 120.0
Lower limit alarm 01-2 10.0
Timer 01-3 5.0
Load rate Upper limit alarm 03-1 120.0
Timer 02-3 5.0
Speed Upper limit alarm 06-1 90.0
Timer 06-3 5.0
2) Set the Operation Timer

The output of the alarm can be interrupted until the time set to Alarm Start Timer (address 10-2)
expires. This function will be available at the time after turning ON the power or after the
beginning of the operation.
The inertia time until the conveyor completely stops can be set to Operation Stop Timer
(address 10-1). This timer allows weighing during the inertia time after having stopped the
conveyor.
Address Operation Stop Timer (0 to 9999) Default: 5.0

Setting Set the time (in second) from the input of the Stop signal until the weighing operation
10-1 completely stops.
Address Alarm Start Timer (0 to 9999) Default: 5.0
Setting Set the time (in second) from the start up of the system until the output of the alarm
10-2 signal.
Timing Diagram
Ta
Ta: equal or less than
0.4 sec
Operation Stop (IN) Tb Tb: Alarm Start Timer
Weighing Ta Tc (address 10-2)
(IN) Tc: Operation Stop
Timer (address
)
The alarm signals are output in each status as below:
During Operation
Operation
Alarm Alarm Start Timer Under normal Operation Stop
Stop
activating operation Timer activating
Upper Limit of Instantaneous
not output not output output output
Feed Rate
Lower Limit of Instantaneous
not output not output output not output
Feed Rate
Upper Limit of Load Rate output output output output
Lower Limit of Load Rate not output output output not output
Upper Limit of Speed Meter not output not output output output
Lower Limit of Speed Meter not output not output output not output
Upper and Lower Limit of
not output not output output not output
Deviation
Upper Limit of Feed Rate Setting output output output output
Lower Limit of Feed Rate Setting output output output output
Note that the Lower Limit of Load Rate and the Lower Limit of Instantaneous Feed Rate are always NOT
output during the Z-operation.

OPERATION CFC-201
3) Set the Moisture
This function allows outputting the pulses and displaying the net weight of the weighing material
without its moisture weight.
Set the moisture to the address 11-1 of the Address Settings by selecting one of the below
moisture setting methods:
0: do not use the moisture setting
1: set the moisture by using the key switch
2: set the moisture by the selection signal. The selection of the moisture setting will be done
from a) set the moisture with the key switch during internal operation (the lamp of [Ex] key is
OFF), or b) set the moisture externally during remote operation (the lamp of [Ex] key is ON).
3: set the moisture externally using 4 to 20mA or Cc-Link.
Address Moisture Setting Method (0 to 3) Default: 0

Setting Select the moisture setting method.
11-1 0: do not use 1: by key switch 2: by selection signal 3: externally
Address Maximum Moisture Percentage (0 to 999) Default: 100
Setting Set the percentage of the reference value when the moisture is set externally using 4 to
11-4 20mA, etc. The default is 100% when 20mA is input.
The totalized value, the fast pulse and the totalized pulse can be output in dry weight by
selecting the moisture mode at the below address of the Address Settings:
Moisture Mode (of the totalized value) (0 to 1) Default: 0

Address
Setting Select the moisture mode from:
11-3 0: wet weight (weighing value without compensation)
1: dry weight (weighing value after moisture compensation)
Moisture Mode (of the totalized pulse) (0 to 1) Default: 0
Address
Moisture Mode (of the fast pulse) (0 to 1) Default: 0
Address
Note that the feed rate cannot be displayed in dry weight. The feed rate uses the wet weight
even if the dry weight has been selected for the totalizer.
Use the following data numbers to set the moisture externally. The value will be set to the
Maximum Moisture Percentage of the address 11-4 of the Address Settings when 10000 is set.
Data Number Item Description

Set 0 to 10000 as 0 to the Maximum Moisture
367 External Moisture
Percentage (of the address 11-4).
Set in the reverse direction of the External Moisture
above:
376 External Reverse Moisture
Set 0 to 10000 as the Maximum Moisture Percentage
(of the address 11-4) to 0.

OPERATION CFC-201
4) Set the Check Weight
The operation signal can be selected at the address 05-2 of the Address Settings when the
conveyor scale has a check weight.
Address Zero Position of Check Weight (0 to 1) Default: 0

Setting Select the logic of the zero position of the check weight.
05-1 0: negative logic 1: positive logic
Address Check Weight Move (0 to 2) Default: 0
Setting Select the move of the check weight.
05-2 0: level 1: pulse 2: external pulse
Level (when the address 05-2 is set to "0")
S-operation Ta Ta
changeover (IN)
(or [SET][4][2]) Ta: 0.2 to 1.0 sec
Lower Check
Weight (OUT)
Pulse (when the address 05-2 is set to "1" or "2")
S-operation
Changeover (IN)
(or [SET][4][2])
Check Weight Zero
Position (OUT)
Ta
Operate Check
Weight (IN)
or press [ENT] key
Tb Tc Td
Lower Check
Weight (OUT)
Ta The Lower Check Weight signal is

Ta: equal or more than 1 sec automatically output when the
Tb: 0.2 to 1.0 sec Check Weight Zero Position
Tc: 0.2 to 1.0 sec signal is ON and when the
Td: 6.8 to 7.2 sec operation is not S-operation.
Use pulses to control multiple check weights.

To use multiple check weights, the Check Weight Zero Position signal has to be input. The logic
of the Check Weight Zero Position signal (data number 0328) can be modified at the address
05-1.
The lifting up and down of the check weight is usually performed by pressing the [ENT] key
during the verification of the check weight at S-operation. The move of the check weight can be
controlled externally by inputting the Operate Check Weight signal (data number 0329) and by
setting "2" to the address 05-2.
The check weight operation error 03-70 will occur and the Lower Check Weight signal will be
pulsed in 1-second pulse at a time interval of about 7 seconds if the Check Weight Zero Position
signal is OFF when it is not during the verification of the check weight at S-operation.

OPERATION CFC-201
5) Remote Operation
The remote operation allows the following:
a) The accuracy can be confirmed externally with the zero adjustment and the check weight.
b) The values of the Independent setting, the Ratio setting and the Moisture setting can be
made externally. The Ratio setting is available only in the remote operation.
c) In case of trouble, the settings can be done manually by switching to the local operation.
The method to switch to the remote operation can be selected between the key input and the
external signal at the address 04-1 of the Address Settings.
Address External Switch Method (0 to 2) Default: 0

Setting Select the method to switch to the operation from external way.
04-1 1: key input 2: selection by external signal
External Adjustment (0 to 2) Default: 0
Address
Setting Select how to adjust from external way.
04-2 0: inhibit the adjustment from external way 1: selection by external signal
2: always adjust externally
Remote Adjustment Mode (0 to 1) Default: 0
Address
Setting Select the process of the Zero Adjustment performed from external way.
04-4 0: standard mode, get input of the adjustment writing
1: short-cut mode, write automatically after adjustment
Set "1" to the address 04-2 to adjust from remote operation.

The Zero Adjustment can be performed automatically with the input of the target pulse at the
address 04-3.
Below is the timing diagram to adjust from remote operation.
(1) Z-operation from Remote Operation (standard mode, address 04-4 is "0")
Z-operation Ta
Changeover (IN)
Ta
Adjustment Tb
Operation (OUT)
Tc
Adjustment Start (IN)
Ta
Calibrating (OUT) Until target pulse
Compensation Tb Tc
Command (IN)
Compensation Ta Td
Completion (OUT)
Ta: equal or less than 0.4 sec

Tb: equal or more than 0.0 sec Only when it is within the
Tc: equal or more than 1.0 sec compensation range
Td: 1.0 sec

OPERATION CFC-201
(2) Z-operation from Remote Operation (short-cut mode, address 04-4 is "1")
Z-operation Ta
Changeover (IN)
Ta
Adjustment Tb
Operation (OUT)
Tc
Ta
Calibrating (OUT) Until target pulse
Compensation Ta Td
Completion (OUT)

Tb: equal or more than 0.0 sec Only when it is within the
Tc: equal or more than 1.0 sec compensation range
Td: 1.0 sec
(3) Check Weight Adjustment from Remote Operation
S-operation Ta
Changeover (IN)
Ta
Adjustment Tb
Operation (OUT)
Tc
Ta
Calibrating (OUT)
Until target pulse

Tb: equal or more than 0.0 sec
Tc: equal or more than 1.0 sec
(4) Set the Preset Counter
The preset counter will increment when the Reset Preset Counter signal becomes ON from an
external way. A signal will be sent to the external when the totalized value becomes equal to the
value of this counter. Then the preset counter is reset, and this process is repeated. Set the
preset counter so that it is 1000 times the internal weighing unit. Refer to Chapter-4 for the
timing of the signal, and the sections 3-2 and 3-3 for the settings of the input/output signals.
Address Preset Counter (0 to 999999999) Default: 0

Setting Set the weighing value to calculate with the preset counter. Set this value so that it is
16-1 1000 times the internal weighing unit.

OPERATION CFC-201
Timing Diagram
Weighing (OUT)
Reset Ta Ta
Preset Counter (IN)
Tb Tb Tb
Preset Counter
Tb Tc Tb Tc
Preset Counter
Output (OUT)
Ta: equal or more than 0.4 sec

Tb: 0.2 to 0.4 sec
Tc: 1.0 sec
(5) Linearization
(1) Description
This function allows compensating electrically the linearity of the load cell input. Only use this
function when there is no linearity due to structural problems of the conveyor. The load cell input
value can be compensated by setting per 10% the difference between the actual load and the
actual measured value.
(2) Before Linearization

Flow the actual quantity based on the indication of the load rate, and input the measured
difference of the actual quantity. The linearization will compensate with a collinear
approximation following the load rate. The relating setting values are listed in the below table.
Set the compensation value in 0.1% unit. The value can be obtained by multiplying -1 by the
difference rate of each load rate.
Address Setting Value

48-1 Select whether or not to enable the linearization. 0: disable 1: enable
48-2 Compensation value at 0 % (c.f. CAUTION below)
48-3 Compensation value at 10 %
48-4 Set the Compensation value at 20 %
48-5 compensation value Compensation value at 30 %
48-6 depending on the Compensation value at 40 %
difference
percentage between
the actual load and
49-3 the actual measured Compensation value at 70 %
49-4 value Compensation value at 80 %
49-6 Compensation value at 100 % (c.f. CAUTION below)
CAUTION
Set 0.0 to the compensation value at 0% and 100% because this
will be the reference value of the linearization by performing the
zero adjustment and the span adjustment.

OPERATION CFC-201
(3) Linearization Procedures
The procedures of the linearization are as below:
a) Before linearization, perform the zero adjustment, and the span adjustment at a load of
100%.
b) Disable the linearization by setting "0" to the address 48-0.
c) Adjust the gate so that the load rate indication is 30%. Flow the actual quantity and note
down its totalized value.
d) Continue to flow the actual quantity per 10% from 40% to 90% and note down the totalized
values.
e) For the range of 10% to 20%, calculate the estimate difference from the weighing result.
f) Calculate the difference rate, and reverse the sign of the obtained values. Set the values to
the addresses 48-3 to 49-6.
g) Enable the linearization by setting "1" to the address 48-0.
(4) Example
In this example, the actual quantity is 40 kg. In this case, the totalized values get by flowing the
actual quantity at each load rate are listed in the table on the left, and the values to set will be
like the table on the right. (The values of 10.0% and 20.0% are the estimate calculated value
from the displacement of the difference)
Indicated Totalized Value of the Difference Difference Address to Value to Set

Load Rate (%) Actual Quantity (kg) (kg) Rate (%) Set (%)
0.0 (40.0) 0 0.0% 48-2 0.0
10.0 39.7 -0.3 -0.8% 48-3 0.8
20.0 39.2 -0.8 -2.0% 48-4 2.0
30.0 38.2 -1.8 -4.5% 48-5 4.5
40.0 37.7 -2.3 -5.8% 48-6 5.8
50.0 36.9 -3.1 -7.8% 49-1 7.8
60.0 37.5 -2.5 -6.3% 49-2 6.3
70.0 38.5 -1.5 -3.8% 49-3 3.8
80.0 39.2 -0.8 -2.0% 49-4 2.0
90.0 39.7 -0.3 -0.8% 49-5 0.8
100.0 40.0 0 0.0% 49-6 0.0
The formulae to obtain the difference rate and the setting value are as below when the indicated
load rate is 50.0%.
 3.1kg ( Difference)
Difference Rate   100  7.75 ≒ 7.8%
40.0 kg ( Actual Quantity )
Value to Set  7.8%  1  7.8%
(5) Principle
Refer to the figure below. The actual quantity has been flown when the indication of the load
rate is 50% but the totalized value of the actual quantity is 5% less than the real value. This
means that the real load is 45% even if the load rate is displayed as 50%. The linearization will
compensate 45% to 50%.

OPERATION CFC-201
100%
Rate 90%
80%
Load
70%
60%
50%
Actual
40%
Actual characteristics
30%
Characteristics obtained by compensating all
20%
10%
0%
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Indicated Value before Compensation (%)
CAUTION The setting needs the reference value of 0.0% and 100%, but if
the setting (to the address 49-1) is only made for 50% as the
figure above, the compensation curve will be like the below figure,
and the compensation will only be performed for 40% to 60%. Be
sure to input the setting values for all the range from 10% to 90%.
100%
90%
80%
Actual Load Rate (%)
70%
60%
50%
40%
30% Actual characteristics
20% Characteristic after compensation
10% Characteristics by compensating all
0%
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Indicated Value before Compensation (%)

OPERATION CFC-201
5.2 Settings of the Constant Feed Weigher

(1) Changeover from External Input to Automatic Operation
The operation can be switched to automatic operation with key operation or external signals by
setting the address 04-3 of the Address Settings.
Automatic Operation Method (0 to 2) Default: 0

Address Select the method to switch to the automatic operation.
Setting 0: by key operation
04-3 1: by Automatic Operation Command signal during the external mode ([Ex] key lamp
ON) and by key operation during the internal mode ([Ex] key lamp OFF)
2: by Automatic Operation Command signal at anytime
(2) Set the Feed Rate Setting (Independent Setting)
The procedure to set the feed rate (independent setting) from external input is as follows.
The "Scale Interval of Feed Rate Setting" of the address 15-3 allows the display to be more
readable by rounding the value below the scale interval when the display is fluctuating due to
analog or pulse setting. The setting of this scale interval display does not affect the internal
calculation.
Using "Hold Feed Rate Setting" of the address 15-4, the feed rate settings that were set
externally can be set to the internal feed rate settings when the operation is switched from
external remote operation to internal operation. (Refer to the figure below)
Remote operation
Individual External feed
setting × rate setting
When set to “1”: copies Remote operation
the setting values when
the operation has been Feed rate
Ratio setting
switched from remote setting
to internal
Internal
Internal feed
rate setting
Internal
This function allows switching between the remote to the internal operation can be done without
changes of flow rate.
The "Reference Value of Feed Rate Setting" of the address 15-5 allows setting the value when
20mA is input if the independent setting is performed at 4 to 20mA analog input. e.g. to set 0 to
120t/h at 4 to 20mA analog input, set 120.0.
The setting method of the independent setting of the feed rate setting can be set at the address
15-6. Normally at the internal operation, the setting is done by key operation. Set "0" to set by
key operation even at remote operation. Set "1" to use 4 to 20mA, Cc-Link, etc at remote
operation.
The method to perform the moisture compensation to the feed rate setting can be selected at
the address 11-2. The Wet Based mode calculates the setting value based on the value
including the moisture. The Dry Based mode calculates the setting value based on the value
without moisture. Given W as wet amount, D as dry amount, and M as moisture, the Wet Based
value can be obtained by the below formula:

OPERATION CFC-201
D
W ( from D  W  (1  M ))
1 M
The Dry Based value can be obtained by the below formula:
W  D  (1  M )
For example, when the feed rate setting is 100t/h and the moisture setting is 10%, the setting
will differ depending on the difference of the calculation method as below:
D 100
Wet based value : W    111 t / h
1  M 1  0 .1
Dry based value : W  D  (1  0.1)  100  1.1  110 t / h
An alarm can be output when a wrong setting has been made by setting the addresses 15-1
(the lower alarm limit of the feed rate setting) and 15-2 (the alarm timer of the feed rate setting).
The upper limit of the feed rate setting is the Maximum Capacity of the address 00-4.
The alarm will be output when the setting value is equal or above the maximum capacity.
The alarm will be output when a state below the lower alarm limit is continuing during the time
set to the alarm timer. The alarm will be reset when the state within the setting values continues
during the time set to the alarm timer.
Address Lower Alarm Limit of Feed Rate Setting (0 to 99999) Default: 120
Setting Set the lower limit of the feed rate setting. The alarm will be output when the feed rate
15-1 setting is below this value.
Address Alarm Timer of Feed Rate Setting (0 to 999) Default: 5.0
Setting Set the time (in second) to continue to output or the time (in second) to reset the alarm
15-2 of the feed rate setting.
Address Scale Interval of Feed Rate Setting (0 to 7) Default: 0
Setting Set the scale interval of the feed rate setting.
15-3 0: 1 1: 2 2: 5 3: 10 4: 20 5: 50 6: 100 7: 200
Hold Feed Rate Setting (0 to 1) Default: 0
Address
Setting Select whether or not to hold and set the setting values of the external operation to the
15-4 internal operation when the operation is switched from external to internal.
0: do not hold and set 1: hold and set
Reference Value of Feed Rate Setting (Independent setting)
(0 to 999999) Default: 120
Address Set the reference value to use to set from external input (normally the value is the
Setting maximum capacity).
15-5 To set the independent setting from analog input, set the reference value when the input
is 100%. E.g. set 120.0 to set 120.0t/h at 20mA analog input. 6 digits maximum can be
input.
Setting Method of Feed Rate Setting (Independent setting)
(0 to 1) Default: 0
Address Set the method of the feed rate setting.
Setting 0: by key operation at anytime
15-6 1: by external signal:
The external setting is available during remote operation. The setting made by the
front touch panel is available during the local operation.
Address Moisture Mode of Feed Rate Setting (0 to 1) Default: 0
Setting Set the method to perform the moisture compensation to the feed rate setting.
11-2 0: wet based 1: dry based

OPERATION CFC-201
(3) Set the Ratio Setting
The ratio setting allows controlling the composition ratio so that it is always constant by
connecting multiple constant feed weighers as main and sub.
100t/h is set as independent setting to the CFC (A) of the product A. The fast pulse output of
CFC (A) is input as pulse string setting to the CFC of the products B to D, and the flow rate of
the CFC of the product A is set to each CFC as independent settings. The ratios 10%, 50% and
0.3% are set to either of the CFC (B, C and D), and the feed rate settings of each CFC are 10t/h,
50t/h and 300kg/h. By configuring the system in this manner, the material can always be fed in a
constant composition ratio even if there is modification to the independent settings of the main
or to the feed rate.
Product Ａ
Independent
setting 　　　　　
DEV
　CFC-201
ＯＰＣＬＢＦＬＳＤ
ｋg
ＳＥＴ
Ｙａｍａｔｏ
Feed rate 100t/h
/h
100t/h ケイリョウモート゛
ＳＥＴ AUTO
P7
７
P8
８
P9
９
Fast pulse
P4 P5 P6
Ｅｘ Adj ４５６
P1 P2 P3
１２３
P0
Ｆ１ LOCK ０ＣＥＮＴ
　　　　　
　CFC-201
Product B
Independent setting
ＯＰＣＬＢＦＬＳＤＳＥＴ
Ｙａｍａｔｏ
DEV ｋg
/h
ケイリョウモート゛
ＳＥＴ AUTO
P7
７
P8
８
P9
９
Feed rate 10t/h
P4 P5 P6
Adj ４５６
Ratio setting
Ｅｘ
P1 P2 P3
１２３
P0
10％
　　　　　
　CFC-201
ｋg
ＳＥＴ Product C
Ｙａｍａｔｏ
Independent setting
DEV
/h
ＳＥＴ AUTO
P7
７
P8
８
P9
９
Feed rate 50t/h
Ratio setting Ｅｘ Adj
P4
P1
４
１
P5
P2
５
２
P6
P3
６
50％
P0
　　　　　
　CFC-201
ｋg
ＳＥＴ
Product D
Ｙａｍａｔｏ
Independent setting
DEV
/h
Feed rate 300kg/h

Independent setting ＳＥＴ
Ｅｘ
AUTO
Adj
P7
P4
７
４
P8
P5
８
５
P9
P6
９
0.3% Ｆ１ LOCK
P1
P0
１
０
P2
２
Ｃ
P3
ＥＮＴ
３
The ratio setting is used to build such a system. The ratio setting is only available at remote
operation.
The address 12-1 allows selecting the mode of the ratio setting from: 0: do not use ratio control,
1: set the ratio by key operation, or 2: set the ratio by external signal.
The address 12-2 allows setting the number of digits of the ratio settings and the maximum
input value (20mA input value at analog input) when the independent setting is input by analog
input or pulse string. For example, set 50 to set 50.00% when 20mA is input by analog input.
This value is the available range of the ratio settings. Note that this range must be set even
when the setting will be done by key operation. The below table is the relation between the
setting value and the setting range of the ratio settings.

OPERATION CFC-201
Reference value of the ratio setting
Setting range of the ratio setting
(address 12-2)
1 to 9 % 0.000 to 9.999
99 to 10% 0.00 to 99.99
100% 00.0 to 199.9
Ratio Setting Mode (0 to 2) Default: 0

Address
Setting Set the setting mode of the ratio.
12-1 0: do not use ratio control 1: set the ratio by key operation
2: set the ratio by external signal
Maximum Ratio (0 to 999) Default: 100
Address Set the reference value in percentage when the ratio is input by 4 to 20mA, etc. The
Setting position of the decimal point of the ratio is as below.
12-2 Maximum ratio to <10% : 0.000
Maximum ratio to <100% : 00.00
Otherwise : 0.0
(4) Control Constant
The control method of the address 14-1 has to be normally set to "0: instantaneous value".
When this instantaneous value control is selected, the operation rate MV can be represented by
the following formula where SV is the feed rate setting value, e (e=SV-PV) is the deviation
amount, and PV is the feed rate.
1
MV α SV  Kp  (1  )e
TiS
α
Feedforward
compensation
Target feed rate ＋ Kp Control output

SV Constant MV
- of proportion
1/TiS
Instantaneous Integral time
Feed rate
PV
Calculation Speed signal
of
Feed rate Weight signal
The factors Kp, Ti and α of the formula can either be set ad the addresses 14-2, 14-3 and
14-4.
The constant of proportion of the address 14-2 is used to set the output amount in proportion to
the instantaneous deviation (the amount reflects the deviation to a large extent). This setting
allows reducing the start-up time after the modification of the setting value or after starting the
system. Normally, use the system at 0.30.
The integral time of the address 14-3 is used to set the output amount in proportion to the
integral value of the deviation (the amount reflects the instantaneous deviation in a small extent,
and when the amount increases the amount reflects in a large extent). This setting allows
targeting the feed rate. Normally, set Kp x 3 x delay time (including the weight average time),
and use the system at 1.50.

OPERATION CFC-201
The time constant of the control operation is determined with Ti/Kp. The below figure shows the
move of the control output when Kp is modified to 0.01, 0.30, and 0.60 with the time constant
set to 5 seconds. The response is following the time constant when the influence of the
proportional control is minimized by setting 0.01 as Kp. The response is immediate when Kp is
set to a larger value, but the proportional output decreases gradually when the deviation
decreases, and moves to the I control following the time constant.
10000
9000
8000
Control Output[100% = 10000]
7000
6000
5000
4000
Control output Kp = 0.30 Ti= 1.50

3000
2000
1000
0
15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Elapsed Time [sec]
The αconstant of the address 14-4 is called the feed forward compensation, and starts the
control from a state previously having output in proportion to the setting value (SV). It is
necessary to reduce the start-up time and the response time of the setting value because the
modification is made in proportion to the setting when the setting has been changed after the
start up.
10000
9000
During operation
Operation stop/ Deviation reset
8000
Control Output [100%=10000]
7000
6000
Output with
5000
Kp and Ti constants
4000
3000
2000
1000 Output with α constant (depending on the modification of settings)
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Elapsed Time [sec]

OPERATION CFC-201
Control Method (0 to 1) Default: 0

Address
Setting Switch the control method between the following.
14-1 0: instantaneous value (normally, use this setting)
1: integral value
Address Kp Constant (0.00 to 999.99) Default: 0.30
Setting Set the control constant Kp (proportional gain).
14-2
Address Ti Constant (0.00 to 99999) Default: 1.50
Setting Set the control constant Ti (integral time).
14-3
Address α Constant (-99.99 to 99999) Default: 0
Setting Set the control constant α (feed forward compensation).
14-4
Address Initial Control Output (0.0 to 200.0) Default: 0
Setting Set 0 to use the system.
14-5
Use the following calculation to replace from conventional systems.
Replacement from CFC-100 (EH782) Constant Feed Weigher

Set as the below table based on the settings of P constant (address 65) and I constant (address
66).
Setting value of CFC-201 Formula When P=120 and I=5 at CFC-100
2 Kp Constant 0.30 0.30

3 Ti Constant 0.3  I cons tan t 0.30  5  1.50
14
4 α Constant 100 / P  0.30 100 / 120  0.30  0.53
5 Initial Control Output 0 .0 0 .0
The above table includes the proportion. To use the same control characteristics as the
conventional system, set to the value of the following table.
Setting value of CFC-201 Formula When P=120 and I=5 at CFC-100

2 Kp Constant 0.01 0.01
3 Ti Constant 0.01 I cons tan t 0.01  5  0.05
14
4 α Constant 100 / P 100 / 120  0.83
Replacement from CFC-200 Constant Feed Weigher

If the initial output Out of the address 14-5 of the CFC-200 Constant Feed Weigher is set to a
value other than 0, set the values based on the below table.
When the Initial Control Output of

Setting value of CFC-201 Formula
CFC-200 is 50.0
4 α Constant Out / 100 50.0 / 100  0.50
14

OPERATION CFC-201
(5) Deviation
The deviation is the difference between the instantaneous feed rate and the feed rate setting
(<instantaneous feed rate> - <feed rate setting>), and the deviation amount is displayed at the
deviation counter. The reference value of the deviation counter can be set to the address 17-1
in the unit of feed rate. The move of the deviation counter will be determined by the setting
values as shown in the table below.
State of Segments Setting Value
△ blinks 1 second deviation  ( reference deviation )  2

△ is ON all the time 2  (reference deviation)  deviation  (reference deviation)  1
 ( reference deviation)  2
□ is ON all the time 1  (reference deviation)  deviation エラー! 編集中のフィールド
コードからは、オブジェクトを
作成できません。
▽ is ON all the time  1  (reference deviation )  deviation  (reference deviation)  2
▽ blinks 1 second  2  (reference deviation)  deviation
The addresses 17-1 to 17-4 are used to set the deviation alarm value and the alarm timer. The
deviation alarm allows setting the alarm value in two phases. For example, when the reference
deviation of the address 17-1 is set to 20.0t/h (instantaneous feed rate unit t/h), the state of
segments will be as follows:
Difference between the feed rate setting and the

State of Segments
instantaneous feed rate
□ is ON Below or equal  20.0 t/h
△ or ▽ is ON  20.0 t/h to  40.0 t/h
△ or ▽ blinks in 1 sec interval  40.0 t/h to  60.0 t/h
△ or ▽ is ON 1 sec and OFF 2 sec  60.0 t/h to  80.0 t/h
The deviation amount is calculated every 200ms and is not the average time. The fluctuation of
the deviation can be reduced by performing the average process of the address 17-6. The alarm
value is detected with the deviation amount after this average process.
Address Reference Deviation (0 to 99999) Default: 1.0

Setting Set the scale interval of the deviation counter. The unit is the feed rate setting.
17-1
Upper and Lower Limit 1 (0 to 99999) Default: 12.0
Address
Setting Set the limit of the absolute value of the deviation amount. The upper and lower limit 1
17-2 of the deviation will be ON if the absolute value of the deviation amount exceeds the
value set to this address.
Address Alarm Timer 1 (0.0 to 99.9) Default: 5.0
Setting Set the delay timer of Upper and Lower Limit 1 in second.
17-3
Upper and Lower Limit 2 (0 to 99999) Default: 24.0
Address
Setting Set the limit of the absolute value of the deviation amount. The upper and lower limit 2
17-4 of the deviation will be ON if the absolute value of the deviation amount exceeds the
value set to this address.
Address Alarm Timer 2 (0.0 to 99.9) Default: 5.0
Setting Set the delay timer of Upper and Lower Limit 2 in second.
17-5
Address Deviation Average (0.0 to 100.0) Default: 0.0
Setting Set the average time of deviation in second. The deviation alarm will detect with the
17-6 value after having performed the deviation average.

OPERATION CFC-201
(6) Control Output Limiter
By setting the control output limiter, the control output of the automatic operation can be kept
within the specified level. For example, the control output will change within the range of 10% to
80% during the automatic operation when the lower limiter of the control output is set to 10%
and the upper limiter is set to 80%.
The control output limiter cannot function during the manual operation. The manual operation
allows modifying by key operation within the range of 0% to 100%.
Address Upper Limit of Control Output Limiter (0 to 100) Default: 0

Setting Set the upper limit of the control output in percentage. The limiter is disabled when 0 is
18-1 set.
Address Lower Limit of Control Output Limiter (0 to 100) Default: 0
Setting Set the lower limit of the control output in percentage. The limiter is disabled when 0 is
18-2 set.
(7) Input the Load with Pulses
Only the control function of the constant feed weigher is available with the input of the load with
pulses.
The speed pulses are input to the CFC system without connecting load cells.
The feed rate setting can be controlled by calculating the feed rate with the input pulses by
setting the weight of one pulse.
Be sure to set "0" (do not perform the self diagnosis) to the address 96-1 before using this
function.
For example, when 0.1kg is set as 1 pulse, the feed rate can be obtained by the input of the
speed pulses with the below formula.
Feed rate  0.1kg  3600 sec input frequency
Input frequency of speed pulses (Hz) Feed rate (t/h)

50 18
100 36
300 108
Speed Input Mode (0 to 3) Default: 0

Address Set the method to set the speed input.
Setting 0: use the speed signal
06-5 1: use the internal pulse (100Hz)
2: use the pulse in proportion to the current control output (100Hz at 100%)
3: use the load input pulse
Weight of Load Input Pulse (0 to 999999) Default: 1000
Address Set the weight of one pulse of the load input pulses when "3" is set at the address 06-5.
Setting The unit is 100 times the unit of the internal weight. Only the internal control function is
06-6 available when this function is used. Be sure to set 0 (do not perform self diagnosis) to
the address 96-1 before using this function.

OPERATION CFC-201
(8) Volumetric Function
1) Overview
The CFW (constant feed weigher) function adjusts the speed of the belt so that it is equal to the
preset flow rate. The flow rate is obtained by multiplying the weight by the moving distance (that
is obtained with speed pulses). This method is called the gravimetric method which performs the
control by weighing continuously.
On the other hand, the method that only adjusts the belt speed based on a fixed weight is called
the volumetric method.
Below are the characteristics of each method.
Method Characteristics
Gravimetric method A control with a high accuracy is available because the weight is
continuously measured. Since it is necessary to detect the weight, a
detecting part that is expensive is necessary.
Volumetric method The system can be constructed at low cost because the weight
detecting part is unnecessary. However the accuracy is low.
The CFW may not be stopped immediately in case of error when it is used in coal feeder of
electric power facility and important composition line. In such facilities, the operation has to be
continued to a maximum extent instead of stopping it immediately when the indicator has failed.
This system allows switching between the gravimetric method and the volumetric method. The
gravimetric method can be switched to the volumetric method by detecting the error of weight
and speed by using the self diagnosis function build in the indicator.
a) Detection of Error of Weight

The below errors of weight are detected.
Error Description
Wiring defective The sensing terminal (3S, 4S) voltage of the exciting voltage is
monitored to detect the wiring defective of the load cells. The sensing
voltage is normally 10V.
The error will be detected if the sensing voltage is equal or above
±30% (equal or above 13V, equal or below 7V).
Input limit The output voltage (2, 5) of the load cells is normally within the range
of 0 to 30mV. The error will be detected when the range is
approximately equal or above 3mV and equal or below -2mV.
AD converter failure The error will be detected when the signal from the AD converter is
interrupted.
Circuit failure The error will be detected when the signal of the control circuit of the
input part of the load cells is interrupted.
Error of right and left The output of the load cells (2 on the right and 2 on the left of the
weight conveyor scale) are compared at the external circuit.
The error will be detected when the output of the load cells changes in
an amount greater than the normal operation.
(Note: An external circuit has to be prepared to perform this detection)
The average value of the weight (that is memorized in the unit of bulk density) is measured
during the normal operation. But when these errors are detected, the control will be performed
by switching automatically the weight value to the average value that was measured during the
normal operation.
Since the weighed material of the coal feeder has a cutout surface that is nearly constant, the
difference of the load rate is the difference of the bulk density per the product of coal.
In general, the average value of the load rate during normal operation is displayed in the unit of
bulk density because it is easier for the coal feeder to manage the bulk density.
The operation can be switched forcedly to the weight volumetric method by the input of a signal
that switches forcedly to the volumetric method in case of weight error.

OPERATION CFC-201
b) Detection of Error of Speed
The speed pulses in proportion to the control output are input when the CFW (constant feed
weigher) is normally operating.
The speed will not be input even if the belt is rotating when errors such as breaking of wire
occur inside the place located as the figure below.
The speed volumetric method detects such error and operates by performing the back
calculation of pulses estimated by the current control output.
The speed volumetric can be used under the condition that: a) the belt is not rotating, b) the coal
feeder has to be tripped by detecting with external circuit the failures and so on of the inverter
and the motor.
The speed pulses during the speed volumetric are obtained with the below formula because the
adjustment is made at installation so that the speed pulses of the rated frequency is returned
when the control output is 100%.
rated frequency
Speed pulses during speed volumetric   current control output [%]
100
The switch to the speed volumetric will be performed when the speed is "0" even if the control
output is 5% or more during 1 second or more (the time can be modified).
The speed volumetric will be reset immediately after a speed pulse is detected, or when the
control output below 5% has continued during 1 second or more (the time can be modified).
2) Procedure
Below is the procedure to use the system in the volumetric method.
1) Set the address 19-1 to "1" or "2" to switch to the volumetric when an error is detected.
When "1" is set: the switch to the weight volumetric is performed when an error in load
cells is detected.
When "2" is set: the switch to the speed volumetric is performed when an error in load
cells and an interruption of speed are detected. Be sure to trip the CFW
with other failure conditions to use the speed volumetric.
2) Set the bulk density when the load rate is 100% to the address 19-5. Set 1.00 when the
bulk density is 1.
3) Set the average time to the address 19-4. Be sure to set a longer time than the time the
load rate becomes constant after the start of the operation. Normally, set 30 minutes or
more.
4) Set the detection time of speed errors to the address 19-6 for using the speed volumetric.
The value set here has to be 2 times the time interval the speed pulse needs to return from
the start of the operation when the control output is about 5%. Although the default time is
1.0 second, set a value as small as possible depending on the system.
OPERATION CFC-201
5) Below is the input/output signal of the volumetric method. Connect the input/output signal
as usage, and perform the allocation following the terminal to connect (at the address 31 to
35).
Display the below items:
Volumetric integral
Gravimetric integral
Set to the address 19-2 Volumetric cause
the signal mode to switch Current bulk density
from external input.
Switch to volumetric Volumetric
Set 1 to the address 19-3

and reset with this signal
(Allocated to the address 31 to 32)
(Allocated to the address 33 to 35)

to hold the volumetric
Output terminal OUT1 to 16

Reset volumetric hold Constant
Input terminal IN1 to 8

AD volumetric
feed
weigher
Circuit to detect the
deviation of the right and CFC-201
left load cells
Speed volumetric
Large deviation
of load cells
An external circuit has to
be prepared to detect the
deviation of the right and
left load cells
3) Display during Volumetric

The display will change from "Weigh mode" to "Volumetric" to show that the operation has
switched to the volumetric method.
The display of the load rate will blink when it is the weight volumetric, and the speed frequency
will blink when it is the speed volumetric. The volumetric will be reset when CFC-201 stops.
4) Display of the Cause of Volumetric

The cause that has switched the operation to the volumetric can be displayed by pressing [4]
key. The message "VOL_FACTOR" will be shown on the indicator.
The digit of the number displayed will be "1" when cause representing that digit has occurred.
The number is "0" during the gravimetric. The volumetric will not start when the system is
stopped, but the volumetric cause can be confirmed even when the system is not operating.
320t/h
Weigh mode
P4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Wiring defective of load cells

Input limit
AD converter failure
Control circuit error of AD converter
Deviation error of right and left load cells
Input of volumetric switch signal
Volumetric during hold
Speed volumetric
Speed volumetric during hold

OPERATION CFC-201
5) Gravimetric Integrating Amount
The integrating amount during gravimetric can be displayed by pressing [2] key. The message
"GRA_TOTAL" will be displayed on the indicator.
6) Volumetric Integrating Amount

The integrating amount during volumetric can be displayed by pressing [3] key. The message
"VOL_TOTAL" will be displayed on the indicator.
7) Display of Bulk Density

Since the weighed material of the coal feeder has a cutout surface that is nearly constant, the
difference of the load rate is the difference of the bulk density per the product of coal.
Factors to convert the load rate to the bulk density are available because it is easier for the coal
feeder to manage the bulk density than the load rate (Set the bulk density when the load rate is
100% to the address 19-5).
The average of the load rate on the belt measured during operation is displayed as bulk density.
To confirm the bulk density, press [F1] key at the weighing mode (and its key lamp will be ON).
The bulk density will be displayed as "b.".
To adjust the bulk density when the product of coal has been changed or when the system has
been switched to the volumetric, display the setting mode by pressing [SET] [1] keys, move the
cursor to "b.", and modify the value of the bulk density. The average that was memorized will be
initialized by the input value.

OPERATION CFC-201
5.3 Method of Use as a Converter

(1) Description of the Converter
Below is the description of the method of use as a load cell/DC4-20mA converter.

Set the address 99-6 to "4" (converter) and then turn the power OFF and ON. Also set the
address 73-2 to "338" to output the load rate signal with limiter from the output signal of analog
output 1.
(2) Turn the Power ON
After turning the power ON, the model code ("CFC-201E"), the program version number (Ver.
x.xx) and the operation mode ("ADMIN (R)") are displayed. Then the self diagnosis starts
automatically and returns to the weigh mode after the completion of the self diagnosis.
The indicator displays as the following figure when it started up correctly and the load rate will
be shown next.
CFC-201 The load rate will be displayed with 3 digits, and the unit is in
OP CLB F L S D SET
percentage.
The display will blink if the load rate is out of range when the
DEV lower and upper limits are set.
Wei g h mode

OPERATION CFC-201
(3) Adjustment
There are two methods to adjust the load rate: the Initial adjustment and the Span adjustment.
The Span adjustment has two methods. One is to adjust by placing the test chain on the belt,
and the other is to adjust with the estimate of the load cell output.
1) Initial Adjustment
1) Press [Adj] [1] keys and the message will change to "INIT
OP CLB F L S D SET
ADJ.".
DEV
kg 2) Press [ENT] key to start the initial adjustment and the load
ＩＮＩＴＡＤＪ．
t/h
rate will be 0.
3) Press [Adj] key and return to the weigh mode.
2) Span Adjustment with Test Chain

1) Press [Adj] [2] keys and the message will change to "SPAN
OP CLB F L S D SET
ADJ.". The span value of the load rate (address 03-5) will be
displayed.
DEV
2) Press [ENT] key to compensate the span value of the load
kg
t/h
ＳＰＡＮＡＤＪ．
rate so that the current load rate will be 100%. Input a value
up to 3 digits and press [ENT] key. The current load rate will
be compensated so that it is the input value (%).
3) Span Adjustment with Load Cell Output

1) Press [Adj] [3] keys and the message will change to "CELL
ADJ.". The setting value of the load cell output (address 58-2
OP CLB F L S D SET
and "Set" on the display) and the current load cell output
DEV voltage ("CELL" on the display) will be displayed in mV.
kg
t/h
ＣＥＬＬＡＤＪ． 2) Press [ENT] key to compensate the load rate span value so

that the load rate of the voltage value of the load cell output
will be 100%. Input a value up to 4 digits (00.00mV) and
press [ENT] key. The load cell will be modified to that value
and the load rate span value will be compensated.
CAUTION
The display will return to the default state when there is no key
input for 10 seconds or more. Press [Adj] key to stop the
adjustment during the process.

INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE CFC-201
Chapter-6 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
6.1 Connection of Load Cell
(1) Load Cell Connector (CON1)
Signal Function Pin No Dedicated cable color

7 1
2 - Signal 1 Black
2 3S + Sensing 2 Brown
8
6 3 + Exciting 3 White
3
5 + Signal 4 Red
5
4 - Exciting 5 Green
4
4S - Sensing 6 Yellow
ＣＯＮ１ NC 7 ---
SE Shield 8 Shielded
(2) Dedicated Cable with Connector (0.5mm2×6 cores)

Manufacturer Type Length
Yamato EJ750-60 2m
Yamato EJ750-70 5m
(3) Cable Connection

The remote sensing method with six wires is applied for load cell connection as shown in the
figure below. A 6-core shield cable should be used for the connection (intermediate wiring) of
load cells. The conduit pipe of this cable should be located 300mm or more apart from the other
lines.
<Connection of 4-wire type load cell>

Junction Intermediate
Terminal block
Terminal block wiring in the panel
２ Black
Dedicated cable
with connector
３ White
0.5 × 6C × 2m o r 5 m
ＬＣ３Ｓ Brown
４ Green ＣＯＮ１
４Ｓ Yellow
５ Red
ＳＥ Shield
<Connection of 6-wire type load cell>

Junction Intermediate Terminal block
Terminal block wiring in the panel
２ Black Dedicated cable
with connector
３ White
0.5 × 6C ×2m or 5m
ＬＣ３Ｓ Brown
４ Green ＣＯＮ１
４Ｓ Yellow
５ Red
ＳＥ Shield

<Connection of 4-20mA weighing signal: EV459 (optional current conversion terminal

block) >
Intermediate wiring Optional terminal block(EV459)

200k Ω
＋５
Dedicated cable with connector
4-20mA ３
＋
0 .5 ×6C × 2m or 5m
３Ｓ
～４ＣＯＮ１
－ 250 Ω 1k Ω ４Ｓ
－２
Shield ＳＥ

6.2 Control Input/Output

(1) Control Input/Output Connector (CN3)
The function of the control input/output is set as below:
Dedicated cable
Signal Function Pin No
Wire Color Wire Mark
IN 1 Operation stop 1 Blue Red-1
IN 2 External selection 2 Blue Black-1
IN 3 Totalizer value reset 3 Pink Red-1
IN 4 Check weight zero position 4 Pink Black-1
IN 5 Deviation reset 5 Green Red-1
IN 6 Setting value hold 6 Green Black-1
IN 7 Automatic operation command 7 Orange Red-1
IN 8 Control output hold 8 Orange Black-1
COM Common 9 Gray Red-1
COM Common 10 Gray Black-1
OUT 1 System ready 15 Green Red-2
OUT 2 Weighing 16 Green Black-2
OUT 3 W-operation 17 Orange Red-2
OUT 4 Calibrating 18 Orange Black-2
OUT 5 Adjustment operation 19 Gray Red-2
OUT 6 Automatic operation 20 Gray Black-2
OUT 7 Compensation completion 21 Blue Red-3
OUT 8 External selection 22 Blue Black-3
OUT 9 Deviation upper-limit/lower-limit-1 11 Blue Red-2
OUT 10 Deviation upper-limit/lower-limit-2 12 Blue Black-2
OUT 11 Setting value upper-limit/lower-limit 13 Pink Red-2
OUT 12 Low-speed operation 14 Pink Black-2
OUT 13 Feed rate upper-limit 25 Green Red-3
OUT 14 Feed rate lower-limit 26 Green Black-3
OUT 15 CPU normal operation 27 Orange Red-3
OUT 16 Alarm 28 Orange Black-3
COM Common 23 Pink Red-3
COM Common 24 Pink Black-3
(2) Equivalent Circuit of Control Input/Output

CFC-201
<Control Input> <Control Output>
12V 24V
Threshold voltage Open collector

3. 3 K Ω
approx 7V 3 . 5m A negative theory Ｒ
D
Max DC30 100mA
Open collector
or relay contact
Control common 0V
Control common
Note 1: Be sure to put a surge killer (D) to connect the relay (R) to the control output.
Note 2: Check the threshold voltage of the input to connect since the LOW level of the open
collector of the control output may only decrease to1.3V.

(3) Dedicated Cable with Connector (AWG28: outside diameter 0.39mm)

Yamato ER968-30 3m
Yamato ER968-50 5m
(4) Function of Control Input Signal

Data No.
Signal Default Value Function
Note2)
IN 1 Operation stop Stops the operation. 0326
IN 2 External selection Validates the external setting and the control. 0317
IN 3 Totalizer value reset Resets the totalizer. Note1) 0321
IN 4 Check weight zero Connects the input of the zero position of the check weight. 0328
position
IN 5 Deviation reset Resets the deviation when the operation is during CFW 1720
mode. Note1)
IN 6 Setting value hold Holds the setting value from external input. 0327
IN 7 Automatic operation Switches to automatic operation when the operation is 1722
command during CFW mode.
IN 8 Control output hold Holds the control output when the operation is during CFW 1721
mode.
Allocation Z-operation changeover Switches to Z (zero) adjustment operation when "External" 0311
Note3) is selected.
Allocation S-operation changeover Switches to S (Span check) adjustment operation when 0312
"External" is selected.
Allocation Adjustment start Starts the calibration operation when the operation is 0315
Z-adjustment or S-adjustment. Note1)
Allocation Compensation command Compensates when the adjustment operation has 0316
completed during Z (zero) adjustment operation. Note1)
Allocation Reset pre-set counter Resets the pre-set counter. Note1) 0323
Allocation Operate check weight Used to operate the check weight from external input. 0329
Allocation Low-speed command Switches the high and low speeds in the 2-stage 0348
changeover mode.p
Allocation Key operation inhibit Inhibits the key operation when this signal is ON. 9530
Allocation Individual data print Commands the individual data printing. 5000
command
Allocation Sub total print command Commands the sub total printing. 5001
Allocation Grand total print Commands the grand total printing. 5002
command
Allocation Status print command Commands the status printing 5003
Allocation Title print Prints the title when the printing format 1 is performed. 5004
Allocation Load cell deviation A signal is input when an error is detected by comparing 0380
externally the deviation of the right and left load cells put to
the coal feeder. The operation is switched to volumetric due
to excess of load cell deviation when this signal is ON.
Allocation Volumetric switch Switches forcedly to volumetric. 0381
Allocation Reset volumetric hold The volumetric hold mode is reset when this signal is input 0382
input when the setting of the volumetric hold mode is "1" (hold).
Note1: This signal is used at the time of start-up. Input a signal having a width of at least 1 second.
Note2: A data number is defined to each bit and word signals. To modify the allocation of signals, set this
number to the address setting.
Note3: The signals shown as "Allocation" are the signals allowing the modification of allocation by modifying the
data number of the addresses 31 and 32 of the address setting. E.g. set "311" to the address 31-1 to
allocate Z-operation changeover signal to IN1.

(5) Function of Output Signal

Data No.
Signal Default Value Function
Note1)
OUT 1 System ready Becomes ON when the operation is ready after power ON. 9510
Becomes OFF when a failure occurs during operation.
OUT 2 Weighing Becomes ON during weighing. 0339
OUT 3 W-operation Becomes ON during W-operation. 0337
OUT 4 Calibrating Becomes ON during calibration at adjustment operation. 0340
OUT 5 Adjustment operation Becomes ON during adjustment operation. 0336
OUT 6 Automatic operation Becomes ON during automatic operation. 1730
OUT 7 Compensation Becomes ON for 1 second when the compensation by the 0342
completion external command has terminated properly during
adjustment operation.
OUT 8 External selection Becomes ON when "External" is selected. 0347
OUT 9 Deviation upper / lower Becomes ON when the deviation alarm 1 occurs. 1732
limit 1
OUT 10 Deviation upper / lower Becomes ON when the deviation alarm 2 occurs. 1733
limit 2
OUT 11 Setting value upper / Becomes ON when the setting value alarm occurs. 1736
lower limit
OUT 12 Low speed operation Becomes ON during the low speed operation. 0360
OUT 13 Feed rate upper limit Becomes ON when the feed rate upper limit alarm occurs. 0333
OUT 14 Feed rate lower limit Becomes ON when the feed rate lower limit alarm occurs. 0332
OUT 15 CPU operating normally Becomes ON /OFF every 200ms when the CPU is 9511
operating normally.
OUT 16 Alarm Is output when either of the load rate, feed rate or speed 0341
alarm occurs.
Allocation Load rate lower limit Becomes ON when the load rate lower limit alarm occurs. 0330
Note2)
Allocation Load rate upper limit Becomes ON when the load rate upper limit alarm occurs. 0331
Allocation Speed lower limit Becomes ON when the speed lower limit alarm occurs. 0334
Allocation Speed upper limit Becomes ON when the speed upper limit alarm occurs. 0335
Allocation Lower check weight Used to place the check weight on the conveyor. 0338
Allocation Load rate upper / lower Becomes ON when the load rate upper/lower limit alarm 0343
limit occurs.
Allocation Feed rate upper / lower Becomes ON when the feed rate upper/lower limit alarm 0344
limit occurs.
Allocation Speed upper / lower limit Becomes ON when the speed upper/lower limit alarm 0345
occurs.
Allocation Preset counter output Becomes ON 1 second when the preset counter increases. 0346
Allocation Setting value lower limit Becomes ON when the setting value lower limit alarm 1734
occurs.
Allocation Setting value upper limit Becomes ON when the setting value upper limit alarm 1735
occurs.
Allocation External automatic Becomes ON when the operation is external and automatic. 1760
This signal is also activated when the operation is stopped.
Allocation Control output lower Becomes ON when the lower limiter of the control output is 1761
limiter on activated. This signal is also activated when the operation
is stopped.
Allocation OR output 1 Outputs OR of 6 optional output signals. 9050
Allocation During volumetric Becomes ON when weight or speed volumetric occurs. 0361
Allocation Weight volumetric Becomes ON when weight volumetric occurs. 0362
Allocation Speed volumetric Becomes ON when speed volumetric occurs. 0363
Note1: The data number is defined to each bit and word signals. To modify the allocation of signals, set this
number to the address setting.
Note2: The signals shown as "Allocation" are the signals allowing the modification of allocation by modifying the
data number of the addresses 33, 34 and 35 of the address setting. E.g. set "331" to the address 33-1 to
allocate Load rate upper limit to OUT1.

(6) Modify the Input/Output Signals
The allocation of the logic signals and the Input/Output signals can be modified. First modify
the below settings before modifying the allocation.
Address Control Input Logic (IN1-8 individually) (0 to 1) Default: 000

Setting Set the logic of the control input per bit.
Address Control Output Logic (IN1-8 individually) (0 to 1) Default: 000000
Setting Set the logic of the control output per bit.
Control Input Output Special Setting (0 to 3) Default: 0
To perform special settings, it is necessary to modify the settings based on the special
use.
Address Note that the special settings remain set if they are not set again to default settings.
Setting
30-3 0: default settings for input and output
1: special settings for input
2: special settings for output
3: special settings for input and output
The control output logic and the control input logic

are set in octal numbers. IN8 -> 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 <- IN1
To set the input logic of IN1.3.6.7 in positive logic,
follow the below procedure: 1
2
a. Line the numbers from IN1 (from right to left) so
that 0 is the signal in negative logic and 1 in 4
positive logic. 10
IN8 ->01100101<- IN1
20
b. Each number above have a corresponding value 40
that is (from the right to the left) 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40,
100
100, 200. Sum the value of all the numbers which
are 1. 200
c. The setting for the output signals is similar to this Total 145
procedure.
Allocate the Input Signals

The allocation of the Input signals can be modified as below. Be sure to not allocate the same
signal to multiple locations.
INITIAL
ADDRESS ITEM FUNCTION
VALUE
1 IN1 allocation Allocate the input signals. The allocation of input data 0
can be done by the data number.
2 IN2 allocation 0: standard allocation (the others are data numbers) 0
3 IN3 allocation IN1: operation stop 0
31 IN 2: external selection
4 IN4 allocation IN 3: totalizer value reset 0
5 IN5 allocation IN 4: check weight zero position 0
IN 5: deviation reset
6 IN6 allocation IN 6: setting value hold 0
1 IN7 allocation IN 7: automatic operation command 0
32 IN 8: control output hold
2 IN8 allocation 0

Allocate the Output Signals
The allocation of the Output signals can be modified as below. Be sure to not allocate the
same signal to multiple locations. The allocation can also be modified by setting the data
number.
INITIAL
ADDRESS ITEM FUNCTION
VALUE
Allocate the output signals. The allocation of output
1 OUT1 allocation data can be done by the data number. 0
0: standard allocation (the others are data numbers)
2 OUT2 allocation 0
OUT1: system ready
33 3 OUT3 allocation OUT 2: weighing 0
4 OUT4 allocation OUT 3: W-operation 0
OUT 4: calibrating
5 OUT5 allocation 0
OUT 5: adjustment operation
6 OUT6 allocation OUT 6: automatic operation 0
OUT 7: compensation completion
1 OUT7 allocation 0
OUT 8: external selection
2 OUT8 allocation OUT 9: deviation upper/lower limit 1 0
3 OUT9 allocation OUT 10: deviation upper/lower limit 2 0
34 OUT 11: setting value upper/lower limit
4 OUT10 allocation OUT 12: low speed operation 0
5 OUT11 allocation OUT 13: feed rate upper limit 0
OUT 14: feed rate lower limit
6 OUT12 allocation OUT 15: CPU operating normally 0
1 OUT13 allocation OUT 16: alarm 0
2 OUT14 allocation 0
35
(7) Input/Output Signal Test

OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV ｋg
ｔ
ＰＡＲＡＬＬＥＬ
Status of control output(OUT16 to 9)

Status of control output(OUT8 to 1)
Status of control input(IN8 to 1)
Follow the below procedures to confirm the input/output status and to output the signal forcibly:
1) Press [SET] [5] [1] [1] keys sequentially.

2) Confirm the status of the control input and output. "1" is displayed when the status of the
input/output is ON, and "0" when it is OFF.
3) The control output can be ON or OFF for testing. Set "1" to the address 99-4 to permit the
test output. For example, press [5] [ENT] keys sequentially to turn ON OUT5, and press [1]
[0] [ENT] keys sequentially to turn ON OUT10. To turn these OFF, press [5] [ENT] and [1]
[0] [ENT] keys again.

6.3 Input/Output for the Constant Feed Weigher

6.3.1 Description
(1) Analog Pulse Input/Output Connector (F-CN1)
Signal Pin Dedicated cable
Function
name No. Wire color Mark
DC6 Power source (6V, 20mA) 28 Orange Black-3
DC15 Power source (15V, 150mA) 14 Pink Black-2
COM1 Control common 13 Pink Red-2
SPIO1 Speed pulse input 26 Green Black-3
COM1 Control common 25 Green Red-3
SPI02 Setting pulse input (also available for control input) 12 Blue Black-2
COM1 Control common 11 Blue Red-2
Fpo+ High-speed pulse output (+) 24 Pink Black-3
Fpo- High-speed pulse output (-) 10 Gray Black-1
COM1 Control common 9 Gray Red-1
DAV01 Analog output1 (voltage) 8 Orange Black-1
DAG01 Analog common1 7 Orange Red-1
DAI01 Analog output1 (current) 6 Green Black-1
DAG01 Analog common1 5 Green Red-1
DAI02 Analog output2 (current) 4 Pink Black-1
DAG02 Analog common2 3 Pink Red-1
ADI01 Analog setting input (current) 2 Blue Black-1
ADG01 Analog setting input common 1 Blue Red-1
(2) Equivalent circuit
<Input> CFC-201 <Output>

P6
24V
4V Fast pulse
Speed pulse
Input output
input 2k O 2V Ｒ
D
SPI01
Schmitt circuit
Speed Output
detector 10nＦ
0V
COM1 Control common
15V Open-collector
Setting pulse (negative logic)
3.3K O
input 4.5mA MAX DC30 100mA
SPI02
Threshold voltage approx 7V
COM1
Control common
(3) Dedicated cable with connector (AWG28, outside diameter: 0.39mm)

Yamato ER968-30 3m
Yamato ER968-50 5m

(4) Function of Signals

Name Function Detailed description
DC6 Speed detector power source Used as a power source (6V, 20mA: max.) for the
(6V) speed detector.
DC15 Speed detector power source Used as a power source (15V, 150mA: max.) for
(15V) the speed detector.
SP01 Speed pulse input Inputs the speed detector signal. (400Hz, max.)
SP02 Setting pulse input Used to set either of "Independent", "Ratio" or
"Moisture" with the pulse signal. Max 200Hz.
(Note1)
It is also available to use as control input. (Note2)
COM1 Control common Common for pulse input
Fpo+ High-speed pulse output (+) Output when the load weight is positive.
It can be output up to 125Hz maximum.
FpO- High-speed pulse (-) Output when the load weight is negative.
COM1 Control common Common for pulse output
DAV01 Analog output1 (voltage) The control signal of the motor is output at 0-10V.
Load resistance: 1kΩ or above (Note3)
DAI01 Analog output1 (current) The control signal of the motor is output at
4-20mA. Load resistance: 500Ω or less (Note3)
DAG01 Analog common1 Common for analog output1. (Note5)
DAI02 Analog output2 (current) The feed rate signal is output at 4-20mA.
Load resistance: 500Ω or less (Note3)
DAG02 Analog common2 Common for analog output2. (Note5)
ADI02 Analog setting input (current) Used for setting "Independent" from upper
hierarchical level. It is input at 4-20mA. (Note4)
ADG01 Analog setting input common Common for analog setting input
Note1: It is necessary to set the data number to the address 71-1 of the address setting to set "Independent",
"Ratio" and "Moisture" with the pulse signal.
Note2: It is also available to use as control input by modifying the address 71-5 to "1". The data number of the
control input signal can be set at the address 71-1.
Note3: For conveyor scale, the analog output signal allows using either "Feed rate" or "Load rate". For CFW, the
analog output1 is used for the control signal. Set the data number to the addresses 73-2 and 75-2 to
specify the output data.
Note4: It is necessary to set the data number to the address 70-4 to set "Independent", "Ratio", "Moisture" and
"Angle" with the analog input signal.
The data number of each data is as follows:
Data name Data No. Data name Data No.
Independent 1727 Feed rate 0365
Ratio 1728 Load rate 0364
Moisture 0367 Control output 1792
Angle 2610 Feed rate (Note6) 0382
Update time feed rate 0389
Note5: This common is isolated from other signals.
Note6: This data is for 2-stage changeover type CFW mode when the span of the feed rate at high/low speed.

6.3.2 Pulse Input/Output
(1) Speed Pulse Input
There are two power sources of the speed detector at the input terminal of the speed pulse.
Note that each power source capacity is different and the speed detector may have failures
when the connection is not correct.
Power Source Power Source Capacity
DC6V 20mA max
DC15V 150mA max
(2) Speed String Input

The settings of Moisture and Independent can be modified with pulse string input terminal. The
modification can also be made by switching and using as parallel input terminal.
1) Set with Pulse String

The input terminal of pulse string can also be used as parallel input signal. Before setting with
pulse string, be sure to confirm that the address 71-5 is set to "0" (pulse string). Select the
value to set to the address 71-5 by the table below.
Setting Value Description Setting Value Description
0367 Moisture 1729 Ratio

(10000 when the reference is (reference 10000)
100%)
0376 Moisture reversed 1750 Independent setting
(10000 when the reference is (weigh of pulse)
0%)
Set the number of reference pulses to the address 71-2, and set the reference output value
when the number of reference pulses has been reached to the address 71-3.
Setting Value Number of Reference

Reference Output Value
(address Description Pulses (address
(address 71-3)
71-1) 71-2)
0367 Moisture Frequency necessary 10000
(reference 10000) when it is the
1729 Ratio reference output 10000
(reference 10000)
1750 Independent setting Number of reference Reference weight value (set at
(weigh of pulse) pulses 100 times the unit of the
internal weight)
Example1: when the moisture is to be set to 0 to 5% at 0 to 300Hz

The below table is an example of moisture setting made with pulse string.
Address Setting Setting Value Description
11-1 Moisture setting method 2 (by selection signal), or Set the moisture
3 (externally) externally.
11-4 Maximum moisture 5 Set 5 from the range of 0
percentage to 5%.
71-1 Pulse input data 0367 Allocate the moisture to
(moisture: reference the pulse string.
10000)
71-2 Number of reference pulses 300 Set 0 to 5% per 300Hz.
71-3 Reference output value 10000 The reference of the
moisture setting is
10000.
71-5 Status mode 0 Set with pulse string.

Example2: when the ratio is to be set to 0 to 30% at 0 to 300Hz
The below table is an example of ratio setting made with pulse string.
12-1 Ratio setting mode 2 (by selection signal) Set the ratio externally.
12-2 Maximum ratio 30 Set 30 from the range of 0
to 30%.
71-1 Pulse input data 1729 Allocate the ratio to the
(ratio: reference 10000) pulse string.
71-2 Number of reference pulses 300 Set 0 to 30% per 300Hz.
71-3 Reference output value 10000 The reference of the ratio
is 10000.
Example3: when the independent is to be set to 3 pulses as 1kg (0.3333kg per pulses)
The below table is an example of independent setting made with pulse string.
The internal weight unit is 0.0001kg at the default setting value. The setting is made in the unit
of 0.01kg as it must be made with 100 times the unit of the internal weight value. In this case,
the independent setting at 100Hz pulse string becomes:
100 Hz  0.001t
 120t / h
3Hz  3600
15-6 Setting method of feed rate 1 (by external signal) Set the independent
setting (independent setting externally.
setting)
71-1 Pulse input data 1750 Allocate the independent
(independent: pulse weight) setting to the pulse
string.
71-2 Number of reference pulses 3 3 pulses is the reference.
71-3 Reference output value 1.00 The reference weight
value is 100 times
the unit of the internal
weight.
The average time of the pulse string input can be modified at the address 71-4 (in second).
This function is used when the value set with pulse string is fluctuating. Note that the response
will delay by using this function even if the setting value can be stabilized.
2) Use the Input Terminal of Pulse String as Parallel Input

To use the input terminal of the pulse string as control input terminal:
1) set "0" to the address 71-1
2) set "1" to the address 71-5
3) set the data number of the control input signal to the address 71-1
Note that it is not allowed to modify the address 71-5 when the address 71-1 is not set to "0".

Pulse Input Data (0 to 9999) Default: 0

Address Set the data number of the pulse string setting. Set "1" to the address 71-5 before
Setting setting the data number to use the pulse string as control input terminal. Note1)
71-1 0: do not use 1727: independent setting
1729: ratio setting 367: moisture setting
1750: independent setting (pulse weight)
Address Number of Reference Pulses (0 to 9999) Default: 100
Setting Set 100% frequency to set independent, ratio and moisture settings. Set the number of
71-2 reference pulses to perform the independent setting with the pulse weight (1750).
Address Reference Output Value (0 to 99999) Default: 10000
Setting Set 10000 to set independent, ratio and moisture settings. Set the weight when the
71-3 number of pulses set at reference value 1 has been input (in the unit of 100 times the
unit of the internal weight value) to perform the independent setting with the pulse
weight (1750).
Setting Set the average time of the pulse string input in second.
71-4
Address Status Mode (0 to 1) Default: 0
Setting Select how to use the input terminal of the pulse string. Be sure to set "0" to the address
71-5 71-1 before setting this address.
0: use as pulse string 1: use as control input
(3) Pulse Output

1) Fast Pulse (positive and negative) and F/I Pulse
The fast pulse can be output with the open collector (DC30V 100mA max) up to 125Hz
maximum. The pulse width can be selected from 0.002 to 9.999. It can also be used as F/I
pulse by switching the kind of pulse at the address 77-1. Below is the difference between the
fast pulse and the F/I pulse.
Fast Pulse (positive and negative)

The fast pulse has two output terminals: positive (FPo+.24) and negative (FPo-.10). The fast
pulse is output all the time at both W-operation and Adjustment operation. It is output from the
negative output terminal when the load becomes less than zero, and can signal to external
devices the deviation of the zero point during the adjustment of the Z-operation.
F/I Pulse
The F/I pulse is used to connect to F/I converter to display the feed rate to analog meters. The
F/I pulse is only output at W-operation and it is not output when the load becomes less than
zero. (It is output in the same state as the low pulse).
Set the weight of the fast pulse to the address 77-2 in the unit of 100 times the unit of the
internal weight. Refer to the decimal point of the address setting to perform the setting.
For example, to output fast pulses at 1kg per 1 pulse in the standard setting, set 1.00kg as the
weight of the fast pulse with the unit of 0.01kg because the unit of the internal weight is
0.0001kg and the unit has to be 100 times the unit of the internal weight.
Set the width of the fast pulse to the address 77-3 in the unit of second to determine the
maximum frequency output from the width of the fast pulse. The relation between the
maximum frequency and the width of the fast pulse is as below. For example, when the width
of the fast pulse is set to 0.020 seconds, the maximum frequency becomes 1/(0.020 sec x
2)=25Hz.
1
max frequency ( Hz ) 
width of fast pulse(77  3)  2

Calculate the frequency output at 120% of the maximum capacity to set the pulse width. For
example, to output 1kg pulse at the capacity of 120t/h, it will be 0.012 seconds as the formulae
below.
max capacity  1.2 120t / h  1.2
max frequency ( Hz )    40 Hz
3600  pulse weight 3600  0.001t
1
pulse width(sec)   0.0125  0.012
max frequency( Hz )  2
Address Pulse Type (0 to 1) Default: 0

Setting Set how to output the fast pulse.
77-1 0: fast pulse (positive and negative) 1: F/I pulse
Pulse Weight (0 to 999999) Default: 1000
Address
Setting Set the weight of 1 fast pulse in the unit of 100 times the unit of the internal weight. Set
77-2 the value referring to the decimal point of the address setting because the decimal point
will be set automatically at the position of 100 times the unit of the internal weight.
Address Pulse Width (0 to 9999) Default: 0.100
Setting Set the width of pulse in the unit of second.
77-3
Address Moisture Mode (0 to 1) Default: 0
Setting Set the moisture mode.
77-4 0: wet 1: dry
Refer to the section of the moisture setting for details about the moisture mode of the address
77-4.
2) Slow (Integration) Pulse

The slow (integration) pulse can be output up to 10Hz maximum (pulse width 10 to 9.999 sec)
with photomos relay connection (AC264V DC125V 0.1A max).
Set the weight of the slow pulse to the address 78-1 in the unit of 1000 times the unit of the
internal weight. Refer to the decimal point of the address setting to perform the setting.
For example, to output slow pulses at 100kg per 1 pulse in the standard setting, set 100.0kg
as the weight of the slow pulse with the unit of 0.1kg because the unit of the internal weight is
0.0001kg and the unit has to be 1000 times the unit of the internal weight.
Set the width of the slow pulse in second to the address 78-2 to determine the maximum
frequency output from the width of the slow pulse. The relation between the maximum
frequency and the width of the slow pulse is as below. For example, when the width of the
slow pulse is set to 0.100 seconds, the maximum frequency becomes 1/(0.100 sec x 2)= 5Hz.
1
max frequency ( Hz ) 
width of slow pulse(78  2)  2
Calculate the frequency output at 120% of the maximum capacity to set the pulse width. For
example, to output 100kg pulse at the capacity of 120t/h, it will be 0.012 seconds as the
formulae below.
max capacity  1.2 120t / h  1.2
max frequency ( Hz )    0.4 Hz
3600  pulse weight 3600  0.1t
1 1
pulse width(sec)    1.25  1.2
max frequency( Hz )  2 0.4  2

Address Pulse Weight (0 to 999999) Default: 100.0

Setting Set the weight of 1 slow pulse in the unit of 1000 times the unit of the internal weight.
78-1 Set the value referring to the decimal point of the address setting because the decimal
point will be set automatically at the position of 1000 times the unit of the internal
weight.
Address Pulse Width (0 to 9999) Default: 1.000
Setting Set the width of pulse in the unit of second.
78-2
Address Moisture Mode (0 to 1) Default: 0
Setting Set the moisture mode.
78-3 0: wet 1: dry
Refer to the section of the moisture setting for details about the moisture mode of the address
78-3.
The slow and the F/I pulses are output only at W-operation. The below figure is the relation
between the pulses and the displayed value of the totalizer when the load is negative.
The totalizer decreases <the minimum unit x 10 counts> when the load becomes negative.
The slow pulse is not output during this time. The display of the totalizer increases when the
load increases. The slow and F/I pulses are not output at this moment. The output starts again
when the displayed value of the totalizer exceeds the value that has been negative for the first
time. And the value of the totalizer and the number of the slow and F/I pulses becomes the
same value all the time at the positive side.
Integrated
value Slow pulse
Maximum-10counts
Display of the integration

Time
The load is negative
(4) Pulse Input/Output Test
Ｆ－ＰＵＬＳＥ
Number of counts of
recieved speed pulses
Number of counts of
received setting pulses
Number of fast pulses transmitted

2) Confirm the input status of speed pulses and setting pulses. The input pulse counts are
displayed on the right of "SP1" and "SP2".
3) The fast pulse can be output forcibly.
a) Set "1" to the address 99-4 to permit the test output.
b) Input the output frequency of the fast pulse within the range of 0 to 250Hz.
c) The output pulse count is displayed on the right of "FP".

(5) Analog Setting Input

1) Setting Procedures
The setting values of moisture, independent and so on can be performed by using the analog
input terminal (DC4-20mA). Select the value to set to the address 70-4 from the table below.
0367 Moisture 1727 Independent setting

(10000 when the reference is (10000 when the reference is
100%) 100%)
0376 Moisture reversed 1729 Ratio
(10000 when the reference is (reference 10000)
0%)
2610 Angle
(10000 when the reference is
0%)
Adjust the zero point with the analog input by setting the initial of the address 70-1. It will be
the zero point at 4mA when "0" is set. Fine adjustments of -6.25μA can be made per 1 count.
For example, to move the zero point 0.4mA to the positive side, set:
0.4mA  0.00625mA  64 counts
The span adjustment with the analog input can be performed by setting the span coefficient of
the address 70-2. 10000 counts will be output at a change of 16mA when 1.0000 is set. For
example, to set the span of 10000 counts at 15mA, set:
16mA(reference span)  15mA(actual span)  1.0666
Set the average of the analog input (in second) at the address 70-3 when the setting is
fluctuating. Note that the response will delay if a large time is set even if the setting can be
stabilized.
Usually set 10000 to the address 70-5 as the reference value of the input data.

The diagram of the procedure of the input of the analog setting is as below:
isolation 0 to 10000/4 to 20mA

Analog
setting input average
4 to 20mA AD + × ×
Initial A70-1
Setting value to Span coefficient
adjust the difference A70-2
of device
Set when the
fluctuation is wide Average time A70-3
1/10000 ×
Conversion factor
Usually 10000 A70-5
0 to 10000/4 to 20mA
× Independent setting
Reference of independent setting A15-5/10000
× Ratio setting
Reference of ratio setting A12-2/10000
× Moisture setting
Reference of moisture setting A11-4/10000
× Angle setting
Reference of angle setting A20-3 A20-4/10000

Selection by data number A70-4
A = Address (e.g. A70-4 = Address 70-4)
Example1: when the moisture is to be set to 0 to 15% at 5 to 18mA

The below table is an example of moisture setting made with analog input terminal.
11-1 Moisture setting method 2 (by selection signal), or Set the moisture
3 (externally) externally.
11-4 Maximum moisture 15 Set 15 from the range of 0
percentage to 15%.
70-1 Initial -160 (5-4)mA/-0.00625mA=-160
counts
70-2 Span 1.2307 18-5=13mA is the span
16/13=1.2307
70-4 Analog setting data 367 Data number of the
moisture setting
70-5 Input reference value data 10000 Reference 10000 of the
moisture setting

The address setting of the analog setting is as below:
Address Initial (-3000 to 3000) Default: 0

Setting Set the parameter to set the initial value of the analog setting input. When it is set to "0",
70-1 the initial value becomes 0 at 4mA input. -6.25μA will be compensated per 1 count.
Span (0 to 99999) Default: 1.0000
Address
Setting Set the parameter to set the span of the analog setting input. When it is set to 1.0000, it
70-2 will be the span reference at 16mA input. When it is set to 2.0000, it will be the span
reference at 8mA input.
Setting Set the average time of the analog input in second.
70-3
Analog Setting Data (0 to 99999) Default: 1727
Address
Setting Set the data number of the data of the analog setting. Note1)
70-4 0: do not use 1727: independent
1729: ratio 367: moisture 2610: angle
Address Input Reference Value Data (0 to 99999) Default: 10000
Setting Set the reference value of the analog setting data. Usually, this setting has to be 10000
70-5 and do not modify it.
2) Fine Adjustment
The initial and the span can be adjusted with the indicator. 400 to 2000 is set for 4 to 20mA
input in the default state.
OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV Adjustment result

(current value)
Ｆ－Ａ／Ｄ
Perform the adjustment, so
that this value becomes
400 at the time of initial
input, and 2000 at the time
of span input.
Perform the fine adjustment with the adjustment screen above when the zero or the span
seems to be deviated due to the destination of the analog input.
1) Set "1" to the address 99-4 to permit the test output.

2) Press [SET] [5], [2] [5] keys sequentially.
3) 4mA is input externally when "dA_Init" blinking. Press the [Adj] key, to set the adjustment
display to 400.
4) The blinking cursor will move from "dA_Init" to "dA_SPan" when the [ENT] key is pressed.
5) 20mA is input externally when "dA_SPAn" blinking. Press the [Adj] key, to set the
adjustment display to 2000.

(6) Analog Output

1) Setting Procedures
The weighed value can be transmitted to external device using the analog output terminal
(DC4-20mA / DC0-10V).
Set "1" to the addresses 73-1 and 75-1 to use the analog output port with current. Set "2" to
use voltage of 0-10V (only available with the address 73-1 analog output1).
Note that the load resistance of the current output is equal or below 500Ω, and the voltage
output is equal or above 1kΩ.
Select which weighing value to output from the table below to set the addresses 73-2 and 75-2.
Either of them will output 10000 maximum.
Set 10000 to the addresses 73-3 and 75-3. 20mA (10V) will be output when the weighed result
is 10000.
0384 Feed rate 0382 Feed rate of 2-stage

changeover (output 10000
as the performance of the
high speed side)
0364 Load rate 0389 Update time feed rate
1799 Control output
Set the average time in second to the addresses 74-1 and 76-1 to decrease the fluctuation of
the analog output. Usually, set "0". Note that the response time will delay when a large value
is set as average time even if the output can be stabilized.
The addresses 74-2 and 76-2 are the initial value of the analog output and are used to adjust
the zero point of the signal level with the transmission destination. The default setting is a
change of 16mA when 1.0000 is set.
When the analog port is used with current, the adjustment is made at about 6.25μA per count.
For example, to set 5mA as zero point, set:
(5  4)  0.00625mA  160 counts
When the analog port is used with voltage, the adjustment is made at about 3.13mV per count.
For example, to set 1V as zero point, set:
1  0.00313V  319 counts
The addresses 74-3 and 76-3 perform the span adjustment of the analog output with the span
coefficient. The default setting is a change of 16mA when 1.0000 is set.
For example, to set 19mA as100% with current, set:
(19  4)  16mA  0.9375
For example, to set 9V as 100% with voltage, set:
9V  10V (reference span)  0.9000

The address setting of the analog output is as below:
Address Analog Output Mode (0 to 2) Default: 1

Setting Set the mode of the analog output.
73-1, 75-1 0: do not use 1: 4-20mA 2: 0-10V (limited to the address 73)
Address Output Data (0 to 9999)
Setting Default: 1799 (for the address 73-2), 384 (for the address 75-2)
73-2, 75-2 Set the data number of the output data. Usually, select from below.
0000: do not use 0384: feed rate 0364: load rate 1799: control output
0382: feed rate for 2-stage changeover 0389: update time feed rate
Address Output Reference (0 to 99999) Default: 10000
Setting Set the reference value of the data to be output. Usually set to 10000. This value will be
73-3, 75-3 the value subtracted by the offset when the addresses 73-4 and 75-4 are set.
Address Offset (-99999 to 99999) Default: 0
Setting Set the offset value of the analog output. 4mA will be output at 50% when 5000 is set.
73-4, 75-4

Setting Set the average time of the analog input in second.
74-1, 76-1
Address Initial (0 to 1000) Default: 0
Setting Set the initial value of the analog output. 6.25μA will be compensated per 1 count.
74-2, 76-2
Address Span (0 to 19999) Default: 1.0000
Setting Set the span value of the analog output.
74-3, 76-3
Address Output Test (0 to 20000) Default: 12.000
Setting Set the reference value to perform the output test.
74-4, 76-4
2) DA Output Adjustment Procedure

4-20mA is output for 0-full scale value at the default state.
Perform the fine adjustment with the adjustment screen above when the zero or the span of
the analog output seems to be deviated due to the analog output connection destination.
Ｆ－Ｄ／Ａ１
D/A initial value

D/A span coefficient
test output value
Zero and Span Adjustment

1) Set "1" to the address 99-4 to permit the test output.
2) Press [SET] [5] [2] [3] keys sequentially to adjust DA output1. Press [SET] [5] [2] [4] keys
sequentially to adjust DA output2.
3) Press [▲] and [▼] keys to adjust the D/A output to 4mA when "dA_Init" is blinking. In this
case, the D/A initial value will increase or decrease per 1 count.
4) The blinking cursor will move from "dA_Init", "dA_SPan" and "dA_tESt" when the [ENT] key
is pressed.
5) Press [▲] and [▼] keys while "dA_SPAn" is blinking to adjust the D/A output to 20mA. In
this case, the D/A span coefficient will increase or decrease per 1 count.

Test output
1) Check the present output current. The current value that is output at present time is
displayed as the test output value.
2) Set "1" to the address 99-4 to permit the test output. To perform the test output, press the
[ENT] key and blink "dA_tESt". 10mA is output when the setting value is 10.000.
3) To change the test output, press the [number keys of the value to set] and [ENT] keys
sequentially.
6.3.3 Relay Output

(1) Relay Output Terminal Block (F-CN2)
Terminal
Symbol Function Description
No.
1 LPo Slow pulse (RY5) Outputs the pulse signal corresponding
2 LPG to the weight.
3 Ry1 Lower check weight Used to put the check weight on the
4 RCOM1 conveyor.
5 Ry2 Feed rate upper / lower limit It is output when the feed rate alarm
occurred.
6 Ry3 Speed upper / lower limit It is output when the speed alarm
occurred.
7 Ry4 Load rate upper / lower limit It is output when the load rate alarm is
occurred.
8 RCOM2 Ry2 to 4: Common Common of Ry2 to 4
Note1: The weight and the width of the slow pulse can be modified at the address 78. The output rating is
264VAC, 125VDC, 0.1A maximum.
Note2: The logic and the signal of Ry1 to 4 can be modified at the address 79. The output rating is 250VAC,
30VDC, 1A maximum.
Note3: Use the cable (0.2□ to 2.0□ AWG24 to 14) for connecting cables.
(2) Output signal test

OP CLB F L S D SET
DEV ｋg
ｔ
Ｆ－ＲＥＬＡＹ

2) Confirm the status of control input and control output. 1 to 4 correspond to Ry1 to 4.
5 corresponds to the slow pulse output.
3) The test allows turning ON and OFF the control output.
a) Set "1" to the address 99-4 to permit the test output.
b) For instance, press [1] to turn ON Ry1, and press [5] to turn ON Ry5.
c) To turn OFF these outputs, press [1] and [5] again.

6.4 Serial Input/Output
(1) Serial Input/Output Connector (CN2)

The terminal of the serial input and output connector is allocated as shown below;
Dedicated cable
Signal Pin
Designation Wire Function
name No. Mark
color
PE Frame earth 1 Blue Red-1
TX0 Serial1 Sent data 2 Blue Black-1 Serial1 (RS232C)
PX0 Serial1 Received data 3 Pink Red-1 9600Bps 8E1
RTS0 Serial1 Sent request 4 Pink Black-1
CTS0 Serial1 Sent ready 5 Green Red-1
GND Signal ground 6 Green Black-1 Common GND
TX2 Serial3 Sent data 7 Orange Red-1 Serial3 (RS232C)
GND Not available 8 Not available 9,600Bps 8E1
Jamper
RX2 Serial3 Received data 9 Gray Red-1

SEL Not available 10 Not available Serial2
TX1 Serial2 Sent data 11 Blue Red-2 (RS422/RS232C)
RX1 Serial2 Received data 12 Blue Black-2
TD+ RS422 Sent data 13 Pink Red-2 9,600Bps
TD- RS422 Sent data 14 Pink Black-2 RS422 : Approx.500m
RD+ RS422 Received data 15 Green Red-2 RS232C: Approx.15m
RD- RS422 Received data 16 Green Black-2
GND Signal ground 17 Orange Red-2 Common GND
EN Unconnected (Not 18 Not available
available)
GND Signal ground 19 Gray Red-2 Common GND
P5 Unconnected (Not 20 Not available
available)
1) The data type of serial1 to 3 is set as <Start (1) + Data (8) + Even parity + stop (1)>.
2) Refer to the address settings for the procedure to modify the serial function.
3) Selection of RS232C/RS422 of serial2:
RS422 is available for serial2 when the dedicated cable with connector is used. Disconnect the
connection of 8-pin and 10-pin in the connector case to modify the serial2 to RS232C.
4) The dedicated cables, orange/black-1, gray/black-1, orange/black-2 and gray/black-2, are not
connected to any point.
5) Be sure to use a twisted cable to use RS242C. Set a terminal resistor (330Ω) to the receiving side.
(2) Dedicated cable with connector (AWG28, core wire outside diameter: 0.39mm)
Yamato ER969-50 5m

(3) Set the Interface

The serial ports are set as below:
Address
Item Settings
Port1 Port2 Port3
Baud rate Select from the following:
Note1)
40-1 41-1 42-1
0: 1200bps 1: 2400bps 2: 4800bps
3: 9600bps 4: 19200bps
Bit length Select from the following:
Note1)
0: 7 bit + even parity + 2 stop bit
1: 7 bit + odd parity + 2 stop bit
40-2 41-2 42-2
4: 8 bit + no parity + 2 stop bit
5: 8 bit + no parity + 1 stop bit
Interface Select from the following:
Note2)
0: not used
1: Yamato standard communication
40-3 41-3 42-3
2: communication with the sequencer
3: connection with the printer
4: CFC-100 compatible 1
5: CFC-100 compatible 2
Note1) Not displayed when the setting of each interface is 0.
Note2) Cannot be set when the same interface is allocated to one of the interface.
(4) Serial Test

ＳＥＲＩＡＬ

2) Short-circuit the input (RD) and output (TD) externally of the serial port to test.
3) When the keys [▲] and [▼] are pressed, the blinking display moves from "SI01.TEST",
"SI02.TEST" and then to "SI03.TEST" sequentially.
4) Blink the serial port to test and press the [ENT] key.
5) The message "good" is displayed for 3 seconds when the serial port is correct, and the
message "no good" is displayed for 3 seconds when it is not correct.

6.5 Printing Data Output

6.5.1 Printing Methods
Allocate the Printer connection (3) to the serial port 1, 2 or 3 to output the printing data to the
Serial Printer. The printing data can be output in four methods by setting parameters to the setting
addresses. The methods are: the Individual Data Printing, the Accumulated Data Printing, the
Sub-total Data Printing and the Grand Total Data Printing. Note that the printing format is for 24
digits printer.
The recommended printers are:
MP-160 (24 digits), MP-190 (24 digits) or MP-310 (29/33 digits)
Manufacturer: Nada Electronics K.K.
(1) Individual Data Printing (Max 3 lines for the title + 3 lines for data) [SET] [6] [2]
When the individual data printing command is received, the time and the individual totalized
weight of that time are printed.
12345678901234567890124 (24 digits)
XXXX XXXXXXXXkg Weighing Count (4dgt) + Totalized Weight (8dgt) + unit (2dgt)
This format can be modified to a format with a title line. In this case, select whether or not to
print the title at the title printing selection input. The printing result will be as below at the
default state when the title is selected to be printed. Refer to the following section "Modify the
Printing Format [SET] [6] [1]" for further details.
12345678901234567890124 (24 digits)

S-COUNT
Total Weighing Count (4dgt) + Totalized Weight (8dgt) + unit (2dgt)
XXXX XXXXXXXXkg
(2) Sub-total Printing (Max 3 lines) [SET] [6] [3]

When the sub-total data printing command is received, the totalized values that have been
individually printed will be accumulated, and the printed date and time, the number of counts of
sub-total and the sub-total totalized values will be printed in the format below:
123456789012345678901234 (24 digits)

08/01/08 10 : 30 Date (8dgt) + Time (5dgt)
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXkg Count of sub-total (4dgt) accumulated totalized values
(12dgt) + Unit
(3) Total Printing (Max 3 lines) [SET] [6] [4]

When the total printing command is received, the total and the number of counts of the total of
the totalized value accumulated in the sub-total area at the time of the individual printing will be
printed in the following format. The data of the sub-total totalized value, the number of counts
of sub-total, the total of the totalized value and the number of counts of the total will be cleared
after having been output.
123456789012345678901234 (24 digits)

08/01/08 10 : 30 Date (8dgt) + Time (5dgt)
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXkg Count of total (4dgt) total of the totalized values (12dgt) +
Unit
(4) Status Printing

The status printing will print the weighing status in the following format.
123456789012345678901234 (24 digits)

08/01/08 10 : 30 Date (8dgt) + Time (5dgt)
TOTAL XXXXXXXXXXXXkg Totalized value: name (10dgt)+data (12 dgt)+unit
FEED XXXXt/h Feed rate: name (4dgt)+data (4dgt)+unit
LOAD XXXX% Load rate: name (5dgt)+data (4dgt)+unit

6.5.2 Printing Format

The printing format for each printing data (Individual printing, Accumulated data printing,
Sub-total printing, Status printing) can be created.
(1) Individual printing
The Individual printing can output the following: a) 3-line data only when the title printing
selection is ON, and b) 3-line data when the title printing selection is ON or OFF. Inside one
line, 3 names or 3 data can be set.
TITLE 1 TITLE 2 TITLE 3 LINE 1
TITLE 1 TITLE 2 TITLE 3 LINE 2 Printed when the title printing selection is ON
TITLE 1 TITLE 2 TITLE 3 LINE 3
DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 LINE 1
DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 LINE 2 Printed whether the title printing selection is ON or
OFF
Max 40 words
Note: Use the title printing at the beginning of the start-up.

(2) Sub-total printing and Total printing
The sub-total printing and the total printing can be set up to 3 lines.
DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 LINE 2 Printed whether the title printing selection is ON or
OFF
Max 40 words
(3) Status printing

The status printing can be set up to 9 lines.
: : Printed whether the title printing selection is ON or

: OFF
:
Max 40 words

6.5.3 Modify the Printing Format [SET] [6] [1]
The printing format can be modified as below:
The Individual printing: modify at the addresses 00 to 06 of [SET] [6] [1].
The Sub-total printing: modify at the addresses 10 to 13 of [SET] [6] [1].
The Total printing: modify the addresses 20 to 23 of [SET] [6] [1].
The Status printing: modify the addresses 30 to 39 of [SET] [6] [1].
For example, to modify the individual data printing format:

a) modify the count to the date.
b) modify to the title print (date and time, and the totalized value).
<Default setting>  <After modification>

123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234
S-COUNT TOTAL DATE TOTAL
XXXXX XXXXXXXXXkg XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXkg
. . XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXkg
Default Value After Modification

Address Item Printed data Printed data
Data number Data number
name name
1 1st line Title 1 ｶｲｽｳ 50161 ﾈﾝｶﾞｯﾋﾟ 22011
2 1st line Title 2 ｾｷｻﾝﾁ 50101 ｾｷｻﾝﾁ 03611
3 1st line Title 3 None 00000 None 00000
01
4 1st line Title 1 printing place / 1 / 1
1 2nd line Title 1 None 00000 None 00000
02
4 2nd line Title 1 printing place / 1 / 1
1 3rd line Title 1 None 00000 None 00000
03
4 3rd line Title 1 printing place / 1 / 1
1 !St line data 1 回数 01017 年月日 02201
2 1st line data 2 毎回積算値 00103 積算値 01017
3 1st line data 3 None 00000 None 00000
04
4 1st line data 1 printing place / 1 / 1
1 2nd line data 1 None 00000 None 00000
05
4 2nd line data1 printing place / 1 / 1
5 2nd line data 2 printing place / 1 / 1
6 2nd line data 3 printing place / 1 / 1
1 3rd line data 1 None 00000 None 00000
06
4 3rd line data 1 printing place / 1 / 1
Note: refer to the next page for the list of the data number and the printed data name.

6.5.4 Data Number and Data Name
Data name3
Data number Data name1 Data name2
Item Digits <DataNo+3>
<DataNo> <DataNo+1> <DataNo+2>
Note5)
Totalized value 03610 12 ｾｷｻﾝﾁ TOTAL 積算値
Individual totalized value 50100 8 ﾏｲｶｲｾｷｻﾝ E-TOTAL 毎回積算
Sub-total 50110 8 ﾁｭｳｶﾝｺﾞｳｹｲ S-TOTAL 中間合計
Total 50120 8 ｺﾞｳｹｲ G-TOTAL 合計
Number of counts of sub-total 50160 8 ﾁｭｳｶﾝｶｲｽｳ S-COUNT 中間加算回数
Number of counts of total 50170 8 ｺﾞｳｹｲｶｲｽｳ G-COUNT 合計加算回数
Feed rate 03860 6 ﾕｿｳﾘｮｳ FEED 輸送量
Load rate 03640 5 ﾌｶﾘﾂ LOAD 負荷率
Speed input 03620 5 ｿｸﾄﾞ SPEED 速度
Moisture 03940 5 Note5) ｽｲﾌﾞﾝ WET 水分
Angle of gradient 2611 4 ｹｲｼｬｶｸﾄﾞ ANGLE 傾斜角
Totalizer during calibration 03720 12 ﾁｮｳｾｲｾｷｻﾝﾁ C-TOTAL 調整積算値
Date 22000 Note2) 8 ﾈﾝｶﾞｯﾋﾟ DATE 年月日
Time 22010 Note2) 5 ｼﾞｺｸ TIME 時刻
Lot number (string) 50900 Note3) 12 ﾛｯﾄﾊﾞﾝｺﾞｳ LOT NO. ロット番号
Lot number (numeric) 50930 Note4) 6 ﾛｯﾄﾊﾞﾝｺﾞｳ LOT NO. ロット番号
Gravimetric totalized value 03560 12 ｸﾞﾗﾋﾞｾｷｻﾝ TOTAL-GRA ｸﾞﾗﾋﾞ積算値
Volumetric totalized value 03570 12 ﾎﾞﾙｾｷｻﾝ TOTAL-VOL ﾎﾞﾙ積算値
Target flow rate 03920 6 ｾｯﾃｲﾁ TARGET 設定値
Independent 17950 6 ﾀﾝﾄﾞｸ SINGLE 単独
Ratio 17970 6 ﾋﾘﾂ RATE 比率
Bulk density 03850 6 ｶｻﾐﾂﾄﾞ DENSITY かさ密度
Control output 17920 6 ｾｲｷﾞｮｼｭﾂﾘｮｸ OUT 制御出力
Deviation amount 17930 6 ﾍﾝｻ DEV 偏差
Kp constant 17120 6 Kp Kp Kp 定数
Ti constant 17130 6 Ｔｉ Ti Ti 定数
Note1: Add one digit to the digit number when the weight value has a decimal point. Add 2 digits when there is a
weight unit.
Note2: The date format is 8 digits (YY/MM/DD) and the time format is 5 digits (hh:mm).
Note3: Alphabetical character can be used for the lot number. The default value is ABCD12345678, but it can be
modified by setting the address 40 of [SET] [6] [1]. Refer to the previous section "Modify the Printing
Format [SET] [6] [1]" for further details.
Note4: Use this data when the lot number is numeric without alphabetical characters. The digit can be modified
in the range of 1 to 6 digits. Modify the digit by using the address 41 of [SET] [6] [1]. Refer to the previous
section "Modify the Printing Format [SET] [6] [1]" for further details.
Note5: The character codes of Data Name3 are output with JIS code.

6.5.5 Settings
Address Return Codes (0 to 1) Default: 0

Setting Select the return codes.
50-1 0: CR 1: CR+LF
Setting Print (0 to 1) Default: 1
Address
Setting Select whether or not to print the guidance of the setting contents during the printing of
50-2 the settings.
0: without guidance 1: with guidance
Waiting Time after Print (0 to 99) Default: 0.1
Address
Setting Set the waiting time after the transmission of the CR code until the transmission of the
50-3 next data. Set the time in 0.1 second unit.
Set 2.1 seconds to connect MP-160.
Clear Sub-total and Count (0 to 1) Default: 0
Address
Setting Select whether or not to clear the sub-total and the number of counts of the sub-total
50-4 after the completion of the sub-total printing.
0: do not clear 1: clear
6.5.6 Input Signal for Printing

1. Individual print command
The data set as the format of the Individual Printing is printed when this signal is input. The
totalized value until the previous Individual Printing will be memorized as the individual
totalized value. The individual totalized value is added to the sub-total and the total, and the
number of counts of the sub-total and the total is incremented by 1.
2. Sub-total print command

The data set as the format of the Sub-Total Printing is printed when this signal is input. When
the value of the address 50-4 is "0", the sub-total and the number of counts of the sub-total is
cleared.
3. Total print command

The data set as the format of the Total Printing is printed when this signal is input. The
sub-total, the number of counts of the sub-total, the total, and the number of counts of the total
is cleared.
4. Status print command

The data set as the format of the Status Printing is printed when this signal is input.
5. Title printing selection

The title settings are printed during the Individual Printing when this signal is ON.
Title printing selection signal:

Individual Printing:

6.5.7 Set the Lot Number to Print
The Lot Number to print composed with alphanumeric in upper case (data number 5090) can
be set up to 12-digit alphanumeric characters. Refer to the below code table. For example, to
set the letter “A”, refer to the code table and set “10” (“1” as higher order and “0” as lower
order).
HIGHER ORDER When the lot number is “ABCD1234”:

Press [SET] [6] [1] and select the print setting
0 1 2 3 4 Addr.40. The setting contents will be displayed as
0 0 A K U & below:
1 1 B L V * Address 40
2 2 C M W + 1.10111213 --- ABCD
2.01020304 --- 1234
LOWER ORDER
3 3 D N X -
3.49494949 --- 4 space code
4 4 E O Y /
5 5 F P Z _
6 6 G Q ! @
7 7 H R # =
8 8 I S $
9 9 J T % SP
The Lot Number to print composed only with numbers (data number 5093) can be set up to 6
digits. This setting can be modified with BCD etc.
6.5.8 Print the Setting Values

The following key operations allow printing the setting values:
Address Setting Print : [SET] [6] [6] Note1)
Print Format Print : [SET] [6] [7] Note1)
Error Record Print : [SET] [6] [8]
Note1: "*" is suffixed to the setting value when the printed result is not the default value.
Example of Setting Value Printing
08/02/27
Adr.00 Feed
1. Feed Unit 5
2. Decimal Pt 1
3. Increment 2
4. Max Feed 100.0*
Adr.01 Feed Alarm
1. FD Upper 120.0
2. FD Lower 10.0
3. FD AlmTime 5.0
4. Averaging 2.0
5. FiltrSence 0
6. AverageOut 0

6.6 Communication with the Sequencer
This system can be connected with the link unit of Mitsubishi Sequencer or Omron Sequencer.
This enables the communication of the control input/output, the setting values and the weighing
data using the dedicated protocol.
6.6.1 Process
1) Send the Feed Rate and the Setting Value
The feed rate and the setting value are written periodically to the data registers D800 to D803.
D803 802 801 800
CFC 0000 03E8 0000 03F2
1000 1010
Feed rate Setting value

2) Change the Setting Value
Set the setting values to the data registers D810 and D811, and then turn ON the inner relay
M2000 of the Sequencer. The inner relay M2000 will be OFF when CFC has read the setting
value. Below is the example when the setting value is 200:
D811 810
[DM0V K200 D810] 0000 00C8
M2000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[SET M2000] 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M2000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: 8 bits of the inner relay M2000 to 2007 are used for communication.
3) Send the Weighing Result

To request the weighing result with serial signal, set the inner relay M2001 of the Sequencer to
ON with [SET] command. The inner relay M2001 will be OFF when CFC has written the
weighing result to the data registers D820 to D831.
M2000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[SET M2001] 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
D829 828 827 826 825 824 823 822 821 820
CFC 0000 0064 0000 C350 0000 0076 0000 0078 0000 0BB8
Speed Load rate Feed rate Setting value Totalizer

100 1000 118 120 3000
M2000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.6.2 Function
The default setting is the communication 1:1 with the Mitsubishi Sequencer. The OMRON
sequencer can be used by modifying the settings. The communication with multiple CFC (n:1) is
also available.
1:1 communication
Serial line (RS232C or RS422)

CFC Sequencer
n:1 communication (bus configuration)
CFC
Serial line (multidrop with RS422)
(1) Sequencer
CFC
(2)
CFC
(3)
Max 8 CFC
The communication is done in sequential order using the on-demand function of the sequencer,
and sending the line owning command from the sequencer to the target CFC.

Address Sequencer (0 to 1) Default: 0

Setting Select the sequencer
60-1 0: Mitsubishi 1: Omron
Address Bus Configuration (0 to 1) Default: 0
Setting Select whether or not to use the bus configuration. To use the bus configuration set the
60-2 device number.
0: no bus configuration 1 or other: bus configuration (device number)
<To use the bus configuration>

The CFC will communicate based on the settings when it receives the line owning
command from the sequencer. The device number set here will be ON when the
communication is completed.
The sequencer clears this device number and sends the next line owning command to
the next CFC.
When this setting is "500", the M500 of the Mitsubishi sequencer will be ON, and the
DM500 of the OMRON sequencer will be 1.
Address ID Number (0 to 31) Default: 00
Setting Set the same ID number as the communication link unit.
60-3
Address PC Number (0 to 99) Default: 00
Setting NOT USED. This number is for future extension.
60-4
Address CFC ID Number (0 to 1) Default: 0
Setting Set the ID number of CFC for bus configuration.
60-5 0: no bus configuration 1 to 8: ID number of CFC
<To use the bus configuration>

Send the value set here with on-demand as the line owning command to CFC from the
sequencer.

6.6.3 Communication and Modification
(1) Send the line owning command (unnecessary when the bus configuration is not used.
Note1)
(2) Receiving bit device (8 devices)

The bit device of the sequencer is read periodically.
Perform the following processes depending on the ON/OFF of this bit device.
(3) Request receiving word device (max 12 devices)

The word device of the sequencer having the setting value (such as moisture and
independent setting) is read when the serial setting command is ON.
(4) Requested transmission word device (max 12 devices)

The weighing result data of CFC (such as the totalized value, volumetric totalized value,
etc) is written to the word device when the request for the serial weighing result is
CFC ON. Sequencer
(5) Every transmission word device (max 6 devices)

CFC data (such as the feed rate, the load rate, etc) is written every time to the word
device of the sequencer.
(6) Every transmission bit device (max 6 devices)

The CFC control output (such as upper and lower limit signals etc) is written every time
to the bit device of the sequencer.
(7) Receiving bit device OFF

The Receiving error bit device is ON when the Receiving bit device cannot process
normally. In this case, the Receiving bit device will not be OFF.
(8) The device that has completed the communication is ON in case of bus configuration.
Perform the RST command of the sequencer to turn OFF the device that has completed
the communication.
Note1: Line owner command

Send the ID number of CFC using the on-demand function of the sequencer.
H H H K
serial setting
TO 0000 0120 0001 0001
command
unit buffer CFC 1 word
no. address ID no.
Note2: Use the SET command to turn ON the bit device of the sequencer. CFC will perform the
clear function (OFF) after the completion of the process of the CFC.
SET M2000 serial setting

command
serial weighing
SET M2001 result request
SET M2002

1) Receiving bit device (8 bit devices)

CFC reads periodically M2000 to 2007 of the Receiving bit device (OMRON device is DM2000
to 2007) when it is the default setting. The process is performed depending on the ON/OFF of
this bit device. The communication device number can be modified at the address setting.
M2000 M2001 M2002 M2003 M2004 M2005 M2006 M2007
0 0 0 0 0 0
device device device device device device

1 2 3 4 5 6
(3) control input of CFC defined in

the address 62
(2) serial weighing result request
(1) serial setting command
(1) The word device of the sequencer having the setting value is read when the serial setting
command is ON.
(2) The weighing result data of CFC is written to the word device of the sequencer when the
serial weighing result request is ON.
(3) The default setting does not perform the communication of the control input of CFC. The
control input such as the Totalizer value reset, Operation stop, etc can be performed by
modifying the address settings.

Address Item Description Default
Receiving bit Set the starting address of the bit device to read
1 2000
device from the sequencer.
Request Set the starting address of the word device to
2 receiving word read by the serial setting command request of 0810
device the sequencer.
Every
Set the starting address of the word device to
3 transmission 0800
write to the sequencer at every cycle.
word device
61 Every
Set the starting address of the bit device to write
4 transmission bit 2010
to the sequencer at every cycle.
device
Requested Set the starting address of the word device to
5 transmission write when the serial weighing result is requested 0820
word device from the sequencer.
Set the address of the bit device that alerts the
Receiving error problem when an error is found in the Receiving
6 2008
bit device bit device process. The bit device set here will be
ON when there is an alert.
Receiving bit
1 0000
device 1 Set the control input of CFC that communicates
Receiving bit with the sequencer in 4 digits. Example:
2 0000
device 2
Receiving bit Control input of CFC Set value
3 0000
device 3 Operation stop 0326
62
Receiving bit External selection 0317
4 0000
device 4 Totalizer value reset 0321
Receiving bit Check weight zero position 0328
5 0000
device 5 Individual print command 5000
Receiving bit
6 Set "0" to not use any devices. 0000
device 6

2) Request receiving word device (max 12 devices)

The word device of the sequencer having the setting value is read when the serial setting
command is ON. The values set to the word device D810, 811 (or OMRON DM800.811) are
read and set.
--------------------- 815 814 813 812 811 D810
……………… 0000 000A
--------------------- device3 device2 device1

defined at the addresses 63, 64.
The setting of the moisture and the independent can be performed by the sequencer by
modifying the address settings.
-------------------- 815 814 813 812 811 D810
……………… 0000 0064 0000 09C4
-------------------- device3 device2 device1

defined at the addresses 63, 64. Ex: moisture=100 and independent=2500.
Request receiving
1 Set the item to set with the sequencer, starting from 0000
word device1
the Request receiving word device1 sequentially in 4
Request receiving digits.
2 0000
word device2
Request receiving Control input of CFC Setting value

3 0000
word device3 Independent 1728
63 Ratio 1729
Request receiving
4 0000
word device4 Moisture 0367
Request receiving Angle 2610

5 0000
word device5 Set "0" when no devices are used.
Request receiving
6 0000
word device6
Request receiving
1 0000
word device7
Request receiving
2 0000
word device8
Request receiving
3 0000
word device9
64
Request receiving
4 0000
word device10
Request receiving
5 0000
word device11
Request receiving
6 0000
word device12

3) Requested transmission word device (max 12 devices)

The weighing result of CFC is written to the word device of the sequencer when the serial
weighing result request is ON. The default settings allow writing the totalized value, the target
feed rate, the feed rate, the load rate and the speed (frequency) to the word devices D820 to
831 (OMROM DM820 to 831).
D831 830 829 828 827 826 825 824 823 822 821 820
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0032 0000 000A 0000 03E8 0000 03E2
device6 device5 device4 device3 device2 device1

Speed Load rate Target feed rate Totalized value
50Hz 10% 1000 1010
defined at the addresses 65, 66.
Requested
1 transmission word 0361
Set the item to send to the sequencer starting from the
device1
Request transmission word device1 sequentially in 4
Requested
digits. Set "0" when no devices are used.
device2
Requested Example of item of CFC Setting value
device3 Load rate with limiter 0338
65
Requested Totalizer 0361
device4 Speed 0362
Requested Speed rate 0363
device5 Load rate 0364
Requested Feed rate without average 0365
device6 External moisture 0367
Requested External moisture (reverse) 0376
device7 Feed rate (high side reference) 0382
Requested Load rate 0383
device8 Feed rate 0384
Requested Feed rate 0386
device9 Update time feed rate 0389
66
Requested Target feed rate 0392
device10 Moisture 0394
Requested Ratio 0396
device11 External independent 1727
Requested External independent 1728
device12 External ratio 1729

4) Every transmission word device (max 6 devices)

The weighing data are periodically written to the word device of the sequencer. The default
settings write the feed rate setting and the feed rate to the word devices D800 to 803 (OMRON
DM800 to 803).
--------------------- 805 804 803 802 801 D800
……………… 0000 03E8 0000 03F2
------------------ device3 device2 device1

Feed rate Feed rate setting
1000 1010
defined at the address 67
Every transmission
1 Set the item to send to the sequencer, starting from 392
word device1
the Every transmission word device1 sequentially in 4
Every transmission digits. Set "0" when no devices are used.
2 386
word device2
Every transmission Example of item of CFC Set value

3 0000
word device3 Load rate with limiter 0338
67
Every transmission Totalizer 0361
4 0000
word device4 Speed 0362
Every transmission Speed rate 0363
5 0000
word device5 Load rate 0364
Every transmission Feed rate without average 0365

6 0000
word device6 External moisture 0367
External moisture (reverse) 0376
Feed rate (high side reference) 0382
Load rate 0383
Feed rate 0384
Feed rate 0386
Update time feed rate 0389
Target feed rate 0392
Moisture 0394
Ratio 0396
External independent 1727
External independent 1728
External ratio 1729

5) Every transmission bit device (8 devices)

This function is used to write the control output by communication with the sequencer. The
default settings do not allow this function, but the control output can be sent to the sequencer by
modifying the address settings. The default settings write to the bit devices M2010 to 2015
(OMROM DM2010 to 2015).
M2010 M2011 M2012 M2013 M2014 M2015
0 0 0 0 0 0
device device device device device device

1 2 3 4 5 6
the control output can be defined at

the address 68.
Every transmission
1 Set the item to send to the sequencer, starting from 0100
bit device1
the Every transmission bit device1 sequentially in 4
Every transmission digits. Set "0" when no devices are used.
2 0101
bit device2
Every transmission Control output of CFC Setting value

3 0000
bit device3 Load rate lower limit 0330
68
Every transmission Load rate upper limit 0331
4 0000
bit device4 Feed rate lower limit 0332
Every transmission Feed rate upper limit 0333
5 0000
bit device5 Speed lower limit 0334
Every transmission Speed upper limit 0335
6 0000
bit device6 Adjustment operation 0336
W-operation 0337
Lower check weight 0338
Weighing 0339
Calibrating 0340
Alarm 0341
Compensation completion 0342
Load rate upper/lower limit 0343
Feed rate upper/lower limit 0344
Speed upper/lower limit 0345
Preset output 0346
External selection 0347

6.6.4 Example of connection with Mitsubishi Sequencer
An example of connection Link Unit of Mitsubishi Sequencer (AISJ71C24-R4) is given below.
1) Wiring Procedures
RS232C
Sequencer Side Cable Connection Indicator Side
PIN NO. And PIN NO.
Signal Signal
25 PIN 9 PIN Signal Direction port 1 port 2 port 3
FG 1
SD (TXD) 2 3 2 11 7 TX
RD (RXD) 3 2 3 12 9 RX
RS 4 7 4 RTSO
CS (CTS) 5 8 5 CTSO
CD 8 1
SG 7 5 6, 17, 19 GND
DSR (DR) 6 6
DTR (ER) 20 4
RS422
Sequencer Side Cable Connection and Indicator Side
Description
Signal Signal Direction PIN NO. Signal
SDB 15 RD + Received data
SDA (Note 1) 16 RD - Received data
RDB 13 TD + Sent data
RDA (Note 1) 14 TD - Sent data
10 SEL RS422 Selection
SG 17 GND Signal ground
FG
Note1: Put a terminal resister (330Ω) at the receiving side of RS422. Use the attached
terminal resister of the CPU Link Unit.

2) Setup of the Sequencer
Mitsubishi A1SJ71C24-R4
Ａ１ＳＪ７１Ｃ２４－Ｒ４
ＲＵＮＮＥＵＳＣＡＮ

ＳＤＡＣＫＳＥＴＥ.
ＲＤＮＡＫＳＣＡＮＥ
ＣＰＵＣ/ＮＳIＯＥ.
ＭＤＰ/Ｓ
ＰＲＯＳＴ.ＤＷＮ
ＳIＯ
ＣＯＭＭＤ/Ｌ
No. Name Description
Mode Setting Used to select the protocol. Set "4" to use
ＳＷ 1
０１
０２
０３
０４
STATION.NO
Switch RS232C, and "8" to use RS422.
ID Number Setting
Set "00" to the ID number. AISJ71C24-R2
０５
×10
③ ０６
②
０７
０８ 2
Switch does not have ID number switch.
×1
０９
１０
１１
１２ MODE ①
Transmission Used to set the transmission. Refer to the
3
Setting Switchnext page for the setup procedures.
ＳＤＡ
Use this connector to perform the
RS422 Terminal communication between CFC and RS232C.
ＳＧ
4
ＳＤＢ
ＦＧ
ＲＤＡ ④ Block. Refer to the instruction manual of the Link

ＮＣ
ＲＤＢ
Unit for the communication with RS232C.
RS-422-485
Ａ１ＳＪ７１Ｃ２４－Ｒ４
A1SJ71C24-R4:RS422
Setting of Setup Status of Setup Switch

Setting Items Remarks
Setup Switch Switch ON OFF
The CPU link ignores
SW01 Master/Local Master Station Local Station
the settings. Note1)
The CPU link must be
ON← SW02 CPU link/Multidrop CPU link Multidrop link
set to ON. Note1)
SW01 SW03 Not used ---------- -------
02 Write permission
03 SW04
during run
Enabled Disabled
04 Baud rate
ON← SW05 Transmission speed 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200
no
used
05 SW06 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
06 SW07 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
07 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
08 SW08 Data bit 8 bit 7 bit
09 SW09 Parity used or not Used Not used
10 SW10 Parity even/odd Even Odd
11 SW11 Stop bit 2 bits 1 bit
12 SW12
Sum-check used or
Used Not used
not
Note1: This switch is not available for RS232C type link unit.

Mitsubishi Q71C24N
ＱＪ７１Ｃ２４Ｎ
RUN ERR.
①
MEU. MEU.
CH1 SD SD CH2
RD RD

1 LED display LED display
②
CH1
RS-232
The RS-232 interface to perform the serial
2 RS-232 interface communication with other devices.
(D-Sub 9P)
The RS-422/485 interface to perform the
RS-422/485
3 serial communication with other devices.
interface
SDA
1
SG
SDB
2 (two-piece terminal block)
3
③ (FG)
RDA
4
5
(FG)
6
RDB
7
CH2
RS-422
/485
Communication Settings
The communication of the Q series C24 can be set with the GX Developer software provided by
Mitsubishi.
Start-up procedures:
Open the windows [GX Developer], [PC parameter], [I/O Allocation] sequentially. Click the Switch
Setting button of the I/O Allocation window (the below figure) and open the "I/O unit, Intelligent
function unit switch setting" window (the figure next page).

Set the I/O Unit and the Intelligent Unit Switch

1) The switches 1 and 3 set the communication speed and the transmission.
(The switch1 is for RS232C and the switch3 is for RS422)
Input “5EE” to the switch1 and 3 like the above figure. The settings of the communication speed
and the transmission are as follows:
communication speed : 9600bps
parity : even parity
stop bit : 1 bit
check code : with check code
2) The switches 2 and 4 set the communication protocol.

(The switch2 is for RS232C and the switch4 is for RS422)
Set "04" (communication protocol: MC protocol format 4) to the switches 2 and 4.

6.6.5 Example of connection with Omron Sequencer
1) Communication Board C200Hα with CPU
Ｃ２００ＨＷ－ＣＯＭ０２Ｃ２００ＨＷ－ＣＯＭ０３
Used to communicate with CFC
1 RS232C connector
ＲＤＹＲＤＹ
ＣＯＭＡＣＯＭＡ
with RS232C.
Used to communicate with CFC
2 RS422 connector
with RS422.
PortＡ PortＡ
９Ｐ９Ｐ
① ②
ＣＯＭＯ２ＲＳ２３２ＣＯＭＯ３ＲＳ４２２/４８５
The system configuration of the communication board can be set at the setting area allocated
to the DM of the sequencer, but use it WITHOUT CHANGING the default settings.
DM Address BIT Function Default Function in the Initial Value
00 - 03 Communication 9600bps 7bit + even parity + 2 stop bit

condition 0
04 - 07 CTS control None

0
DM6555
08 - 11 Link setting Not used at the upper link mode
0
12 - 15 Communication Select the upper link mode

mode 0
00 - 07 Baud rate Not used. Enabled when the

00 Communication condition is “1”.
DM6556
08 - 15 Format setting Not used. Enabled when the
00 Communication condition is “1”.
00 - 15 Transmission delay The transmission delay is 00ms.
DM6557 00
00 - 07 Device No. The device number is 00.

DM6558 00
Note: It is not necessary to change the system configuration of the communication board if the
communication setting of CFC is: 9600bps 7 bits + even parity + 2 stop bits.

2) Wiring Procedures with Omron sequencer
RS232C
Sequencer CFC
Cable connection and
PIN number PIN number
Signal signal direction Signal
LK201(25P) COM02(9P) Port1 Port2 Port3
FG 1 1
SD 2 2 2 11 7 TX
RD 3 3 3 12 9 RX
RS 4 4 4 RTS
CS 5 5 5 CTS
SG 7 9 6 17 8 GND
DR 7
only 9PIN
ER 20 8
RS422
Sequencer CFC
Cable connection and
PIN number Description
Signal signal direction PIN no. Signal
LK202(9P) COM03(9P)
SDA 9 1 15 RD+ Receiving data
SDB 5 2 16 RD- Receiving data
RDA 6 6 13 TD+ Sending data
RDB 1 8 14 TD- Sending data
10 SEL Select RS422
17 GND Signal ground

6.7 CFC-100 Compatible Communication
This system can communicate with the function of CFC-100 and external display devices.
Modify the interface of the serial port to 4 or 5 to use this function. This communication can be
done at two serial ports simultaneously.
6.7.1 Connect External Display Device

1) Overview
The weighing data is output in per 200ms. It is used to import and analyze the feeding wave
patterns with the computer, and to connect another display device.
1) Select "0" at the address 45-1 or 46-1.
2) The data of the data number set at the address 45-2 or 46-2 is output at 50 ms interval.
3) No decimal point or weight unit is added to this format.
4) POL represents + when it is positive and - when it is negative.
S S P 5 4 3 2 1 0 E
T O 10 10 10 10 10 10 T
X P L X
5) It can be switched to the sub process at the address 45-3 or 46-3.
6) SP becomes 1 to 9 when the ID number 1 to 9 is set at the address 45-4 or 46-4.
2) Example of Connection with the Large Display Device EJ681

To connect with the large display device EJ681, follow the procedures below:
Wiring Procedures
RS232C
EJ681 Cable Connection CFC
and PIN NO.
Signal Signal
Signal Direction Port 1 Port 2 Port 3
RXD 2 11 7 TX
4 RTSO
5 CTSO
SG 6, 17, 19 GND
RS422
EJ681 Cable Connection and CFC
RD- 13 TD +
RD+ 14 TD -
SG 17 GND
Note1: Put a terminal resister (100Ω) at the receiving side of RS422. Be sure to use a twisted-pair
cable.
Setting Procedure
Display Device (EJ681) Indicator
DS1 Baud rate: 9600
ON (set "3" to the addresses 40-1, 41-1, 42-1)
● ● ● ●
Bit length: 8E1
● ● ● ● (set "6" to the addresses 40-2, 41-2, 42-2)
Interface: CFC-100 compatible
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9600bps 8E1 (set "4" or "5" to the addresses 40-3, 41-3,
42-3)
J1 RS422 : 1-2 short Format: format
RS232C : 2-3 short (set "1" to the addresses 45-1, 46-1)
DG2 3: selection of Format 3

6.7.2 CFC-100 Compatible Mode

This function allows communicating with the computer with the same method as CFC-100.
Set "1" to the address 45-1 or 46-1 before using this mode.
1) Connecting Procedures
RS232C
Sequencer Side Cable Connection Indicator Side
PIN NO. And PIN NO.
Signal Signal
25 PIN 9 PIN Signal Direction port 1 port 2 port 3
FG 1
SD (TXD) 2 3 2 11 7 TX
RD (RXD) 3 2 3 12 9 RX
RS 4 7 4 RTSO
CS (CTS) 5 8 5 CTSO
SG 7 5 6, 17, 19 GND
RS422
Sequencer Side Cable Connection and Indicator Side
Description
TxD- (2) 15 RD + Received data
TxD+ (1) (Note 1) 16 RD - Received data
RxD- (4) 13 TD + Sent data
RxD+ (3) (Note 1) 14 TD - Sent data
10 SEL RS422 Selection
GND1 (6) 17 GND Signal ground
Note1: The diagram is the wiring diagram when RSCV-T/PV of Data Link is used as a RS232C/422
converter. Put a terminal resister (330Ω) at the receiving side of RS422. Use the attached
terminal resister of the CPU Link Unit.
2) Overview of Communication Protocol (sending and receiving data)

(1) The polling method is used to request the sending and receiving data with the host CPU as
the master station.
(2) The host CPU sends the sending text data after the positive acknowledge (ACK) has been
returned after the transmission of the request of receiving data (ENQ1).
(3) The sending specifying mode sends the specified data at sending mode after the request of
sending data (ENQ2) from the host CPU after memorizing the data to CFC. (The data is
memorized to the RAM protected against power failure)
(4) Return NAK from the host CPU when the sending data from CFC cannot be read properly.
(5) CR code is not necessary when the address 45-3 or 46-3 is "0". When it is "1", add the CR
code.

3) Overview of Communication Protocol (receiving data)

(from the computer to CFC)
E C S E C E C
N 1 T Text T O
Host CPU Q R X X R T R
A C A C
CFC N C N C
C C
A A
K R K R
K R K R
Normal Error Normal Error
Contents of Text Data
0 3 S V Setting value , S R Setting value , ,
Number Header Setting Separator Example to send 3 data

of data value
Setting Value (Independent, Ratio, Moisture)
SV SpSpSp1234,
This is composed with the data "SpSpSp" + the setting value (4

digits) + ",". The setting is done assuming that there is a decimal
point.
The setting is specified by this header like below:

SV: Independent setting (only for the constant feed
weigher)
SR: Ratio setting (only for the constant feed weigher)
SM: Moisture setting
Each of the settings can be done simultaneously.

Input Accepted All the Time
CM Sp００００００, This is an external control signal that can be accepted all the
time. It is normally "0", but it has to be "1" to reset.
Totalized Value Reset
Deviation Reset (only for the constant feed weigher)

Determine the Serial Output Data
This function allows specifying the sending data to output from

ST ０００００００, CFC. Set "0" to the addresses 45-2 and 46-2 before using this
function.
Specify the output method.

0: output all the data
1: output by specifying the data individually (refer to below)
0: when the output method (above) is "0: output all the data"
The measuring data depending on the type of the
operator will all be output.
1: when the output method (above) is "1: output by specifying the
data individually.
Set the data to output. 6 output data maximum can be
defined from the below table.
Code Output Data Code Output Data
0 Do not output 8 Control output amount

1 Totalized value 9 Independent setting value
2 Setting value A Ratio setting value
3 Instantaneous feed rate B Moisture setting value
4 Load rate C Angle setting value
5 Alarm status D
6 Weighing status E
7 Speed input F
1) It is recommended to set the serial output data periodically because

the data is memorized in the RAM with protection against power
failure. It is not necessary to set it every time.
CAUTION
2) The position of the decimal point of each setting value will be at the
position set for each settings.
3) "Sp" ($20) can be replaced by "0" ($30).
4) The settings of independent, ratio and moisture can be set in CFC,
but the setting values can also be confirmed at Ex-operation. (Only
the setting values set by key operation can be serial-output when it
is not the Ex-operation)
4) Overview of Communication Protocol (sending data)

(from CFC to the computer)
The sending data can be determined by the operation mode like the table below. It is
necessary to specify within this range to specify the data to output by setting "0" to the
addresses 45-2 and 46-2. The data shown in this table is output when all the data is output
by setting "1" to the addresses 45-2 and 46-2.
Operator Common Sending Data Data Depending on the Operator
Conveyor scale Totalized value

Reclaimer type Speed input frequency Angle setting value
conveyor scale Instantaneous feed rate
CFW (Constant feed Moisture setting value Feed rate setting
weigher) Load rate Independent setting value
2-stage changeover Operation status Ratio setting value
type CFW Alarm output Control output amount

Normal Error
N C
E C A C
A
N 2 C
Host CPU K R
Q R K R
S E C E C
CFC
T Text T O
X X R T R
CFC sends data to the host by creating the sending data from the contents of the setting
values when it receives ENQ2 from the host. The relation between the setting value and the
sending data are as below.
Contents of Text Data
Weighing Weighing
1 0 T L value , S V value , ,
Number Header Weighing Separator Example to send 10 data

of data value
Totalized Value
TL １２３４５６７８．９ｋｇ，
The data is composed with the header "TL" + the 9-digit totalized value + 1-digit decimal
point (10 digits when there is no decimal point) + 2-digit unit + ",". The highest order
digit will be Sp when there is no decimal point. The unit will be automatically selected
from "g", "kg" or "t". The highest order bit will be "-" when the totalized value is negative.
Feed Rate Setting
SF １２３．４ｋｈ，
The data is composed with the header "SF" + the 4-digit setting value + 1-digit decimal
point + 2-digit unit + ",". The highest order digit will be Sp when there is no decimal
point. The unit will be automatically selected from "gm", "km", "tm", "gh", "kh" or "th".
Instantaneous Feed Rate
MV １２３．４ｋｈ，
The data is composed with the header "MV" + the 4-digit instantaneous feed rate +
1-digit decimal point + 2-digit unit + ",". The highest order digit will be Sp when there is
no decimal point. The unit will be automatically selected from "gm", "km", "tm", "gh", "kh"
or "th".
Load Rate
LD １００．０％Ｓｐ，
The data is composed with the header "LD" + the 4-digit load rate + 1-digit decimal point
+ the unit "%Sp" + ",".

Independent Setting Value
SV １２３．４ｋｈ，
The data is composed with the header "SV" + the 4-digit independent value + 1-digit
decimal point + 2-digit unit (such as the instantaneous feed rate) + ",". The unit will be
automatically selected from "kh" or "th" (only for type_C and Type_D).
Ratio Setting Value
SR Sp１０．０％Sp，
The data is composed with the header "SR" + the 4-digit ratio value + 1-digit decimal
point + 2-digit unit "%Sp" + "," (only for type_C and Type_D).
Moisture Setting Value
SM SpSp５．０％Sp，
The data is composed with the header "SM" + the 4-digit moisture value + 1-digit
decimal point (fixed) + 2-digit unit "%Sp" + ",".
Angle Setting Value
AG －２５．０SpSp，
The data is composed with the header "AG" + 1-digit sign ("+" or "-") + the 3-digit angle
value + 1-digit decimal point (fixed) + "SpSp" + ",".
Speed Input Frequency
FQ Sp１００．ＨＺ，
The data is composed with the header "FQ" + "Sp" + the 3-digit speed input frequency +
1-digit decimal point (fixed) + the unit "Hz" + ",".
Control Output
OT Sp２５．０％Sp，
The data is composed with the header "OT" + the 4-digit control output amount + 1-digit
decimal point (fixed) + "%Sp" + ",".

Alarm Output
CM SpSp０ＨＬ０Ｈ，
Load rate alarm

Instantaneous feed rate alarm
Speed input alarm
Deviation alarm
Setting value alarm
0: normal
H: upper limit alarm
L: lower limit alarm
Operation Status
CM WSp０００００，
Calibrating
One-touch compensation completion
Weighing
Low-speed operation
Automatic operation
0: OFF
1: ON
Operation mode
WSp: W-operation
ZSp: Z-operation
SSp: S-operation
TSp: T-operation
PSp: P-operation
EW: Ex-W operation
EZ: Ex-Z operation
ES: EX-S operation

6.8 Yamato Original Communication Format
This communication format allows reading and writing the internal data of CFC. The computer
that is the main device sends a request, and CFC returns the results. The transmission is
performed using labels (called data label) that function like the name of the data used inside
CFC. Refer to the following chapter for further details about the data label.
To use this function, change the serial port of the interface to connect the computer to "1" that
will enable the Yamato Standard Communication. Nine CFC maximum can be connected to the
computer using RS422. In this case, be sure to set "0" as the station ID number to the address
47-1, and be sure to NOT set the same station ID number to the communication line.
The data is numeric when the second digit of the data label is “W” or “B”, and string when it is
“S”.
6.8.1 Write Numeric Data from the Computer

The station ID number, the data label and the serial number are added to the data to modify and
then the data is sent to write numeric data from the computer. When there are more than one
identical data (ex: the baud rate exists in 3 places, 40-1, 41-1 and 42-1), the data will be
classified by the added serial number. The 2-digit station ID number will be abbreviated when
the station ID is not used.
Request from the computer
E C L
N ID no. Data Label Serial Variable
no. length data
Q area R F
A C L
Response from CFC C ID no.
Normal
K R F
N Auxiliary C L
Error A ID no. Error code error
K code R F
1) The ACK code will be returned when the CFC side completes the writing process normally.
2) The corresponding error code and the NAK code will be returned when the process cannot
terminate normally.
3) The computer communicates using data labels with variable length data.
4) The station ID number is not added when "0" is set to the address 47-1.

6.8.2 Read Numeric Data from the Computer
E C L
N ID no. Data Label Serial
no.
Q R F
A C L
Response from CFC C ID no. Variable length data area
Normal
K R F
N Auxiliary C L
Error A ID no. Error code error
K code R F
1) The computer adds the data label and the serial number to the data, and sends it to CFC.
2) The 2-digit station ID number will be abbreviated when the station ID is not used.
3) The variable length data is added to the data label and the serial number and sent to the
computer when CFC responds normally.
4) The error code and the auxiliary code are sent to the computer when CFC cannot respond
normally.
6.8.3 Write String Data from the Computer

1) The block number (3 digits) and the number of data (3 digits) are added to the data before
sending the string data from the computer to CFC.
2) The block number is added sequentially from 1 to 999 to the data exceeding 999 bytes, and
the final block number is 0.
3) The time out period of the string data is 3 seconds, and the process will terminate as an
error if the next block cannot be input within 3 seconds. The second digit of the data label
of the string data is “s”.

E C L
N IDno. Data Label Serial Block Data
String data Format format
Q no. no. no. R F
A C L A C L
Response from CFC C IDno C IDno
K R F K R F
N Auxiliary C L
A IDno. Error code error
K code R F

6.8.4 Read String Data from the Computer

1) The block number (3 digits) and the data length (3 digits) will be added to the data when
there is a read request of string data.
2) The block number is added sequentially from 1 to 999 to the data exceeding 999 bytes, and
the final block number is 0.
3) The time out period of the string data is 3 seconds, and the process will terminate as an
error if the next block cannot be input within 3 seconds. The second digit of the data label
of the string data is “s”.

E C L A C L A C L
N IDno. Data Label Serial C C
Q no. R F K R F K R F
A C L Format
Response from CFC C IDno. Block Data
String data A
K no. length R F
N Auxiliary C L
A IDno. Error code error
K d R F

6.9 Save and Load the Setting Values via USB
The data internally set to CFC can be saved to and loaded from the USB memory.
6.9.1 USB Connection

Below is the figure of the USB connection.
CON1 OP1 OP2

mini-A terminal:
connect the mini-A terminal here
CN2
POWER
CN3
AC85 ～264v
Ｌ
Arvel AUM20MA02
Ｎ Yamato USB
ＰＥ USB memory
CFC-XXX
mini-A plug standard A receptacle
Only the following USB memory can be used:

1) USB standard 1.1 or 2.0.
2) USB mass storage class using SCSI command.
3) Only the first partition will be read.
4) FAT16 formatted. (NTFS and FAT32 are not available)
5) HUB not built-in.
There is a mini-A terminal on the back face of CFC. Connect the USB memory through the
dedicated cable.
CAUTION Be sure to use the USB memory when the weighing device is NOT under
operation.
DO NOT save to or import from the USB memory during the weighing device is
operating.

6.9.2 Procedures
(1) Save the Setting Values [SET] [7] [2] [1]
The setting values of the indicator can be saved to the USB memory.
1) Press [SET] [7] [2] [1] and the display will be as the figure below.
Z PP PF F S C CZ
OW
AW ｋg
UW ｔ
ＵＳＢＳＡＶＥ
Internal Setting
Product
Print
Error history
Selected： Not selected：
2) Select the data to save.

a. The data to be saved will be displayed as "0" and the other data will be displayed as "_"
(underscore).
b. Set the number 0 to 3 using the keys to select the data to save. A message will be
displayed during 3 seconds after having pressed the key.
c. The data and message corresponding to each key number is as below.
Key Data Message

0 Internal setting INTERNAL
1 Product BLAND DATA
2 Print PRINT DATA
3 Error history ERROR HIS
The [C] key allows switching whether to select all or not.
3) Connect the USB memory and press [ENT] key. The message "OK? (Y:4 N:else)" will be
displayed.
4) Press [4] key to start saving the selected data and the display will be as below.
To abort the transmission of setting data to the USB memory, press [C] or [SET] key
during the transmission, and the display will return to the selection of the data to save.
Z PP PF F S C CZ
OW
AW ｋg Saving progress
UW ｔ unsent:
ＵｓｂＳａｖｅ sent:
Not applied:
the communication state
5) The message "Save End" will be displayed after the transmission and a file is saved to the
USB memory.
6) The transmitted data will be saved as a csv file named by the month, the day, the time and
minute (MMDDhhmm). For instance, the data saved on August 31, 2007 at 21:38 will be
saved as a file named “08312138.csv”.

(2) Load the Setting Values [SET] [7] [2] [2]
The setting values saved in the USB memory can be loaded and set to CFC.
1) Connect the USB memory. Press [SET] [7] [2] [2] to select loading the setting values. If
there is an available USB memory connected, the contents of the directory of the USB
memory is read and the display of the indicator will be as follows.
Z PP PF F S C CZ
OW
AW ｋg
UW ｔ
ＳｅｌｅｃｔＦｉｌｅ
a. Only the root directory (the first partition) is available to import from the USB memory.
b. Max. 20 files having the extension “.csv” can be read.
2) Use the up and down keys to select the file to load from the USB memory.
3) The selected file will be analyzed and the setting value saved inside will be displayed.
Description
Z PP PF F S C CZ
No data: " "
OW
AW ｋg Do not load: " "
UW ｔ
Load: " "
ＳｅｌｅｃｔＤａｔａ
Internal setting
Product
Print
4) Select the setting value to load to CFC using [0] to [2] keys and [C] key.
5) Press [ENT] key and the message "OK? (Y:4 N:else)" will be displayed.
6) Press [4] key and the selected data is loaded and the display will be as below.
Z PP PF F S C CZ
OW
Saving progress
AW ｋg
UW ｔ unsent:
sent:
ＤａｔａＲｅｎｅｗｌ
Not applied:
the communication state
7) The message "Completion" will be displayed after the transmission and a file is saved to
the USB memory.

OPTION CFC-201
Chapter-7 OPTION
7.1 D/A and relay output
(1) Optional Board: EV567F
１
Ｂ－ＣＮ１２ Manufacturer Type
３ Yamato EV567F-00U
１
２
When this optional board is inserted to the optional slot,
３ set the related settings to the addresses 80's.
Ｂ－ＣＮ２４
５
６
１
２
Ｂ－ＣＮ３３
４
５
(2) Connector Type Terminal Block (connecting cable: 0.2□ to 2.0□ AWG24 to 14)
Terminal No. Signal name Function

B-CN1 1 Voltage output (V) Outputs either voltage or current.
(Note1) 2 Current output (I) The default setting outputs 4 to
3 Analog common (COM) 20mADC for the load rate.
B-CN1 1 Relay-1 a-contact (R1a) Operating
(Note2) 2 Relay-1 b-contact (R1b)
3 Relay-1 common (COM1)
4 Relay-2 a-contact (R2a) Automatic operation
5 Relay-2 b-contact (R2b)
6 Relay-2 common (COM2)
B-CN1 1 Relay-3 a-contact (R3a) External operation
(Note2) 2 Relay-4 a-contact (R4a) Preset output
3 Relay-5 a-contact (R5a) Deviation alarm1
4 Relay-6 a-contact (R6a) Deviation alarm2
5 Relay-3～6 common (COM3)
Note1: The analog output signals can be changed to other signals.
Note2: The relay output signals can be changed to other signals.
(3) D/A Output

Output mode : Either of: 0 to 4V, 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 16mA or 4 to 20mA
Output : Feed rate, load rate, control output.
Accuracy : 1/1,000
Load resistance : Voltage output: 1kΩ or above, Current output: 500Ω or less (with
isolation)

OPTION CFC-201
(4) Relay Output Specification :
Number of contacts : 2 independent form C contact, 4 common form A contact
Contact capacity : 250VAC 1A, 30VDC 1A (max)
(5) DA Output Adjustment
The default settings output 4 to 20mA as 0 to Full-scale value.
Ｂ－Ｄ／Ａ
D/A initial value

D/A span coefficient
Test output value
Perform fine adjustments at the adjustment screen shown above when the zero or span of the
analog output is deviated due to connection destination.
1) Set "1" to the address 99-4 to permit the test output of the settings.
2) Press [SET] [5] [3] [2] keys sequentially to adjust the DA output.
3) Press [▲] and [▼] keys to adjust the D/A output to 4mA when "dA_Init" is blinking. The D/A
initial value will increment or decrement by 1.
4) Press [ENT] key and the blinking display will shift from "dA_Init", "dA_SPan" and "dA_tESt"
sequentially.
5) Press [▲] and [▼] keys while "dA_SPAn" is blinking to adjust the D/A output to 20mA. The
D/A span coefficient will increment or decrement by 1.
Test output
1) Check the present output current. The current (voltage) value output at present is displayed
as the test output value.
2) Set "1" to the address 99-4 to permit the test output of the settings. Press [ENT] key and
blink "dA_tESt" to execute the test output. E.g. when the setting value is "10.000", 10mA
will be output.
3) Press [the number key of the setting value] and [ENT] sequentially to change the test
output.
(6) Relay Output Test

2) "ON" will be displayed when the relay output is turned on, and "OFF" is displayed when it is
turned off.
3) The relay output can be turned ON or OFF for test. Set "1" to the address 99-4 to permit the
test output of the settings. For instance, press [3] key to turn on the relay3, and [4] to turn
on the relay4. To turn off the output, press the same key again.

OPTION CFC-201
7.2 Cc-Link Interface
(1) Specification
CC-Link (Control & Communication Link) enables the high-speed communication of the
input/output such as ON/OFF information or weighing data of the indicator with the Mitsubishi
sequencer.
Indicator(1) Indicator(2) Indicator(n)
PLC(Mitsubishi)
ｋg ｋg ｋg
ｔｔｔ
Power ＣＰＵ 16 units(Max.)

Master station P7 P8 P9 P7 P8 P9 P7 P8 P9
ＳＥＴＧ
７８９ＳＥＴＧ
７８９ＳＥＴＧ
７８９
ＮＮＮ
P4 P5 P6 P4 P5 P6 P4 P5 P6
ＤＡ
0 Ｔ４５６ 0 Ｔ４５６ 0 Ｔ４５６
ＤＢ P1 P2 P3
P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3
１２３１２３１２３
ＤＧ
ＳＬＤ P0 P0 P0
０ＣＥＮＴ０ＣＥＮＴ０ＣＥＮＴ
Remote station Remote station Remote station
1. Master station: AJ61BT11 or A1SJ61BT11(Mitsubishi)

2. Remote station: Optional board(EV569F) for CC-Link
3. Transmission speed: 156 kbps/625 kbps/2.5 Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps (initial setting)
4. Maximum transmission distance: Depending on transmission speed
156 kbps: 1200m (max.) 625 kbps: 600m (max.)
2.5 Mbps: 200m (max.) 5 Mbps: 150m (max.)
10 Mbps: 100m (max.)
5. Maximum number of units connected: 16 units (4 stations × 16 units = 64 stations: 4
stations are occupied by one unit)
6. CC-Link Dedicated cable: Kuramo Electric FANC-SB 0.5mm2 x 3

OPTION CFC-201
(2) Rear View of Optional Board
Manufacturer Type
Yamato EV569F-00U
Designation Description
１２３４
Connector
D-CN1
① 1 Connect the CC-Link dedicated cable.

terminal block
Be sure to turn OFF the switch when the board to
2 Terminal switch
TRM
OFF
use it.
-ON ②
Turns ON when the communication with the master
１２３４
3 RUN lamp
station is normal.
D-CN2
① 4 ERR lamp Turns ON when a transmission error occurs.

5 SD lamp Turns ON during the data transmission.
③
RUN
ERR ④ 6 RD lamp Turns ON while the data is received.
SD
RD ⑤ Station No. Set the digit of 10 to "×10", and set the digit of 1 to
⑥ 7
setting switch "×1". Be sure to set within 1 to 61.
STATION NO.
x10
⑦ Transmission
0：156kbps 1：625kbps 2：2.5Mbps
x1
8 speed setting
3：5Mbps 4：10Mbps (default)
switch
⑧
RATE
B

OPTION CFC-201
(3) Wiring Procedures

Indicator1 Indicator2
Indicator n
EV569F EV569F EV569F
blue DA
white DB
Mitsubishi sequencer yellow DG 16 devices max
fasten together
D-CN1
D-CN1
shielded SLD
D-CN1
the 110 Oend
１２３４
１２３４
１２３４
TRM
OFF
TRM
OFF
TRM
TRM
OFF
-ON
terminal to the
-ON -ON OFF
-ON terminal block
Power
ＣＰＵ
D-CN2
D-CN2
D-CN2
source
１２３４
Turn OFF
１２３４
１２３４
Master ID RUN
ALL THE RUN
RUN
SWITCHES
ERR ERR ERR
SD SD SD
RD
put the attached
RD RD
of the
x10
STATION NO.
x10
STATION NO.
end terminal
x10
STATION NO.
end terminal
between
x1
x1
x1
DA and DB
RATE
RATE
blue DA
RATE
B
B
B
white DB
yellow DG
shielded SLD dedicated cable dedicated cable dedicated cable
CAUTION Be sure that all the switches of the end terminal resistor of the terminal blocks are
turned OFF. One terminal block of EV569 will not be used. Either of the terminals
can be used. The end terminal resistor is attached to the master module.
Connect it to both sides of the network cables.
Option D
(EV569F)
the end terminal resistor switch

has to be OFF
strip the coating

(do not solder)
D-CN1
１２３４
11mm blue DA
TRM
OFF
white DB
-ON
yellow DG
D-CN2
１２３４
１２３４５６７８
RUN
ERR
SD
RD shield
isolated tube
x10
x1
one of the terminal block is not used

RATE
B
power source
1) Strip 11mm from the end of the cables, bind two cables together, and plug them to the
terminal block.
2) Screw them with a driver.
3) Check that the cables are firmly plugged.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the dedicated cable. Never use solder cables. Solder cables may
cause disconnection or breaking of wires.

OPTION CFC-201
(4) Remote Input/Output

1) Allocation of the Buffer Memory
EV569F is a remote device station owning 4 stations per device. The station ID number will be
from 1 to 61 increasing its number per 4. The buffer addresses of the station ID from the
master station are listed below.
Remote register Remote register

Remote bit input Remote bit output
input output
Station ID Buffer address Buffer address Buffer address Buffer address
number
Starting Final Starting Final Starting Final Starting Final
address address address address address address address address
1 00E0 00E7 0160 0167 02E0 02EF 01E0 01EF

5 00E8 00EF 0168 016F 02F0 02FF 01F0 01FF
9 00F0 00F7 0170 0177 0300 030F 0200 020F
13 00F8 00FF 0178 017F 0310 031F 0210 021F
17 0100 0107 0180 0187 0320 032F 0220 022F
21 0108 010F 0188 018F 0330 033F 0230 023F
25 0110 0117 0190 0197 0340 034F 0240 024F
29 0118 011F 0198 019F 0350 035F 0250 025F
33 0120 0127 01A0 01A7 0360 036F 0260 026F
37 0128 012F 01A8 01AF 0370 037F 0270 027F
41 0130 0137 01B0 01B7 0380 038F 0280 028F
45 0138 013F 01B8 01BF 0390 039F 0290 029F
49 0140 0147 01C0 01C7 03A0 03AF 02A0 02AF
53 0148 014F 01C8 01CF 03B0 03BF 02B0 02BF
57 0150 0157 01D0 01D7 03C0 03CF 02C0 02CF
61 0158 015F 01D8 01DF 03D0 03DF 02D0 02DF

OPTION CFC-201
2) Allocation of Remote Bit Input

Buffer Device Buffer Device
Bit Signal name Bit Signal name
memory No. memory No.
Write weighing settings
0 RX0000 0 RX0020 Load rate lower limit
response
Read weighing result
1 RX0001 1 RX0021 Load rate upper limit
response
General command
2 RX0002 2 RX0022 Speed lower limit
response
Write[0] / read[1]
3 RX0003 3 RX0023 Speed upper limit
selection response
Operation mode switch
4 RX0004 4 RX0024 Lower check weight
response
Not used
5 RX0005 5 RX0025 Load rate upper / lower limit
00E0 00E2
CPU in normal operation
6 RX0006 6 RX0026 Feed rate upper / lower limit
Word[0] / bit[1]
7 RX0007 7 RX0027 Speed upper / lower limit
selection response
8 RX0008 8 RX0028 Preset counter output
General command auxiliary
9 RX0009 9 RX0029
number
A RX000A A RX002A
response
B RX000B B RX002B
C RX000C C RX002C Not used
D RX000D D RX002D
Not used
E RX000E E RX002E
F RX000F F RX002F
0 RX0010 System ready 0 RX0030
1 RX0011 Weighing 1 RX0031
2 RX0012 W-operation 2 RX0032
3 RX0013 Calibrating 3 RX0033
4 RX0014 Adjustment operation 4 RX0034
Not used
5 RX0015 Automatic operation 5 RX0035
6 RX0016 Compensation completion 6 RX0036
7 RX0017 External selection 7 RX0037
00E1 00E3
8 RX0018 Deviation upper / lower limit1 8 RX0038
9 RX0019 Deviation upper / lower limit2 9 RX0039
A RX001A Setting value alarm A RX003A Transmission allocation bit 1
B RX001B Low speed operation B RX003B Transmission allocation bit 2
C RX001C Feed rate upper limit C RX003C Transmission allocation bit 3
D RX001D Feed rate lower limit D RX003D Transmission allocation bit 4
E RX001E CPU operating normally E RX003E Transmission allocation bit 5
F RX001F Alarm F RX003F Transmission allocation bit 6
00E7 B RX007B System ready
Note: The buffer memory above is for the station ID number 1. The buffer memory address will change when
the station ID number differs. The buffer memory from 00E4 to 00E6 is not used.

OPTION CFC-201
Signal name Function
This signal is not used.

Write weighing
It becomes ON when the writing request of the weighing setting value
setting value
sent from the master module is completed. It becomes OFF when the
response
request is OFF.

Read weighing
It becomes ON when the reading request of the weighing setting
result
value sent from the master module is completed. It becomes OFF
response
when the request is OFF.
This signal becomes ON when the execution of general command
General command
request sent from the master module is completed. It becomes OFF
response
when the request is OFF.
This signal returns the same signal as the Write / read selection
Write / read response specified from the sequencer by the general command
selection response request sent from the master module when the general command is
completed. It becomes ON when the read request is sent.
Operation mode
This signal is for future extension.
switch response
This signal returns the same signal as the Word / bit selection
Word / bit selection response specified from the sequencer by the general command
response request sent from the master module when the general command is
completed. It becomes ON when the Bit request is sent.
This signal returns the same signal as the General command

General command
auxiliary number response specified from the sequencer by the
auxiliary number
general command request sent from the master module when the
response
general command is completed.
Transmission
This is an area to the extension of bit output.
allocation bit (1～6)
Note: The other signals are identical to the control output signals.

OPTION CFC-201
3) Allocation of Remote Bit Output

Buffer Device Buffer Device
Bit Signal name Bit Signal name
memory No. memory No.
Write weighing settings
0 RY0000 0 RY0020 Z-operation changeover
request
Read weighing result
1 RY0001 1 RY0021 S-operation changeover
request
General command
2 RY0002 2 RY0022 Adjustment start
request
3 RY0003 Write[0] / read[1] selection 3 RY0023 Compensation command
4 RY0004 Operation mode switch request 4 RY0024 Operate check weight
5 RY0005 5 RY0025 Reset preset

0160 Not used Note2) 0162
6 RY0006 6 RY0026 Low speed command
7 RY0007 Word[0] / bit[1] selection 7 RY0027
8 RY0008 8 RY0028
9 RY0009 General command auxiliary 9 RY0029
A RY000A number request A RY002A
Not used Note2)
B RY000B B RY002B
C RY000C C RY002C
D RY000D D RY002D
Not used Note2)
E RY000E E RY002E
F RY000F F RY002F
0 RY0010 Operation stop 0 RY0030
1 RY0011 External selection 1 RY0031
2 RY0012 Totalizer value reset 2 RY0032
3 RY0013 Check weight zero position 3 RY0033
4 RY0014 Deviation reset 4 RY0034
Not used Note2)
5 RY0015 Setting value hold 5 RY0035
6 RY0016 Automatic operation command 6 RY0036
7 RY0017 Control output hold 7 RY0037
0161 0163
8 RY0018 8 RY0038
9 RY0019 9 RY0039
A RY001A A RY003A Receiving allocation bit1
B RY001B B RY003B Receiving allocation bit2
Not used Note2)
C RY001C C RY003C Receiving allocation bit3
D RY001D D RY003D Receiving allocation bit4
E RY001E E RY003E Receiving allocation bit5
F RY001F F RY003F Receiving allocation bit6
Note1: The buffer memory above is for the station ID no.1. The buffer memory address will change when the
station ID no. differs.
Note2: The buffer memory 0164 to 0167 is not used. Set "0" for future use.

OPTION CFC-201
Signal name Function

Write weighing
This is a request signal to write the weighing settings using the
setting value request
remote register output.
Read weighing This signal is not used.

result This is a request signal to read the weighing result from the master
request module.
Write / read This is a signal to select write or read with the general command.
selection Turn this signal OFF to write, and ON to read.
Operation mode
This signal is for future extension. Set "0".
switch request
This is a signal to select whether the data to request to the indicator

Word / bit selection is word or bit at the time of the request of the general command from
the master module. Turn this signal ON to select bit data.
General command This signal specifies the auxiliary number of the general command at
auxiliary number the time of the request of the general command from the master
request module. Normally, set "0".
Receiving allocation
This is an area to the extension of bit input.
bit (1～6)
Note: The other signals are identical to the control output signals.

OPTION CFC-201
4) Allocation of Remote Register Input

Buffer
Data name Description Area *4
memory
02E0 *1 (lower bit) The totalized value is stored. *3

Totalized value O1
02E1 (upper bit)
02E2 (lower bit) The feed rate is stored. *3

Feed rate O2
02E3 (upper bit)
02E4 (lower bit) The target feed rate is stored. *3

Target feed rate O3
02E5 (upper bit)
02E6 Load rate The load rate (1000 at 100%) is stored. *3 O4
02E7 Speed The speed (Hz) is stored. *3 O5
02E8 Control output The control output (100 at 100%) is stored. *3 O6
02E9 External independent The external independent is stored. *3 O7
02EA External ratio The value set as external ratio is stored. *3 O8
The value set as external moisture is stored.
02EB External moisture O9
*3
(lower bit)
02EC The setting value of the general command is
General
returned to read and write with the general --------
data response
02ED command.
(upper bit)
The command number of the general

Command number
02EE command is returned to read and write with --------
response
the general command. *2
The operation mode number set from the

Operation mode
02EF sequencer is reflected when it is under --------
Response
special specification.
Note2: Refer to the instruction manual fro the command number (data number).
Note3: The allocation can be modified at the address settings.
Note4: The data of the areas O1 to O9 are updated all the time.

OPTION CFC-201
5) Allocation of Remote Register Output

Buffer
Data name Description Area
memory
01E0 *1
Not used. *3 I1
01E1
01E2
Not used. *3 I2
01E3
01E4 External independent Input the independent setting. *3 I3 *4
Input the ratio setting so that it is 10000 at

100%.
The reference value of the ratio setting
01E5 External ratio I4 *4
(100%) can be modified at the address 12-2.
e.g. if this is set to 50%, the ratio at 10000
counts will be 50.00%. *3
Input the moisture setting so that it is 10000
at 100 %.
The reference value of the moisture setting
01E6 External moisture I5 *4
(100% can be modified at the address 11-4.
e.g. if this is set to 50%, the moisture at
10000 counts will be 50.0%. *3
01E7 Not used. *3 I6
01E8
Not used. *3 I7
01E9
01EA
Not used. *3 I8
01EB
01EC (lower bit) This is an area to set the setting value to

General data setting value read and write with the general command. --------
01ED (upper bit) (this is ignored during the reading process)
Command number setting This is an area to set the data number to

01EE --------
value read and write with the general command. *2
This is an area to set the operation mode
Operation mode
01EF number when it is under the special --------
setting value
specification.
Note2: Refer to the instruction manual fro the command number (data number).
Note3: The allocation can be modified at the address settings.
Note4: The setting values are written to the indicator within 100ms when the setting values are written to the
areas I3, I4, I5.

OPTION CFC-201
(5) Operation of CC-Link

1) Shutdown
When the CC-Link optional board (EV569F) is not used even it is installed, it is recommended
to shutdown it by disabling its use by setting "0" to the address 80-1.
The default setting displays the time over error ("TIME OVER") when there is a communication
error.
The communication starts automatically when the address 80-1 is set to "1". The time over
error will be displayed when the communication line is not connected or when the power of the
master station is not turned ON. This error will be cleared when the communication becomes
normal again.
2) Monitor Display
The communication status of CC-Link can be monitored by the test menu of the indicator.
　　　　　
　
Link Run monitor lamp

□ ：RUN Link error lamp
＿：STOP □：error
ＬＩＮＫ－ＭＯＮＩＴ＿：normal
Station No.(ID)
Baud rate setting monitor
Setting monitor
version of the
IC version communication program
1) Press the keys [SET] [5] [3] [1].

2) The monitor above will be displayed.
3) Press [SET] four times to return to the weighing mode.
Display Description
Link RUN monitor lamp □: Link RUN
＿: Link STOP
Link error lamp □: Link error
＿: Link normal
Station No.(ID) setting The station ID number set with the station ID number
monitor switch is displayed.
Baud rate setting monitor The transmission speed set with the transmission speed
setting switch is displayed in kbps.
IC version The version of the hardware of the control IC of CC-Link
is displayed.
Version of the The version of the program of the CC-Link control is
communication program displayed.

OPTION CFC-201
3) I/O Monitor Display

The ON/OFF status of the remote I/O of CC-Link can be monitored at the test menu of the
indicator.
Ｙａｍａｔｏ
ＲＸ／Ｙ００－０Ｆ thedevice address
thestatus of theinput bit 0to7

thestatus of theinput bit 8toF
the status of theoutput bit 0to7
thestatus of the output bit 8toF
1) Press [SET] [5] [3] [2].

2) The ON status (1) and the OFF status (0) of the bit input/output from the indicator are
displayed. The word data (RWw, RWr) is also displayed in binary code. The address can be
changed using [▲] and [▼] keys.
[▼]↓
R X / Y 0 0 - 0 F R W w / R W r 0 0
[▼]↓ ↑[▲] [▼]↓ ↑[▲]
R X / Y 1 0 - 1 F R W w / R W r 0 1
:
[▼]↓ : ↑[▲] [▼]↓ : ↑[▲]
:
R X / Y 6 0 - 6 F R W w / R W r 0 9
[▼]↓ ↑[▲] [▼]↓ ↑[▲]
R X / Y 7 0 - 7 F R W w / R W r 0 A
:
↑[▲] [▼]↓ ↑[▲]
:
R W w / R W r 0 F
3) The output data can be forced to be ON/OFF. (This is only available when the address 99-6
is set to "1" that permits the test output. When this address is not set to "1", only the output
status can be viewed)
For example, if [1] [0] [ENT] is pressed when the display is "RX/Y 00-0F", RX0A (the 3rd
digit from the right of "out F-8" of the display becomes ON. It becomes OFF when [1] [0]
[ENT] is pressed again.
4) Press [ENT] key four times to return to the weighing mode.

OPTION CFC-201
(6) Description of the Master Module

(1) The CC-Link master module is composed with 32 modules.
(2) Use X0000 to 001F and Y0000 to 001F as the input and output of the startup of the link,
the shutdown, etc, when the master module is placed at the start of the base unit. Note that
this sequencer unit has the same number for X and Y.
(3) Use the X and Y devices listed below to link with the indicator.
Signal Function Signal Function

no (the signal name is underlined) no (the signal name is underlined)
X00 Module error becomes ON when the Y00 Refresh command
module has a failure. Do not link the permits or inhibits the bit output to the
indicator in this case. indicator to the master module. All the
X01 Data link status at host station bit output from the master unit will be
becomes OFF before startup and OFF when this device is OFF.
when all the devices have a failure.
X02 Parameter setting status becomes Y04 Module reset request turns X4 ON
ON when the parameter has an error. when it succeeded, and turns X0 ON
X03 Data link status at other stations when it failed.
becomes ON when there is a device
having an error.
X04 Module reset acceptance complete Y06 Data link startup request from buffer
X06 Data link startup buffer memory memory parameters turns X0006 ON
parameter normal completion when it succeeded and turns X0007
becomes ON when the startup ended ON when it failed.
successfully after Data link startup The link starts up based on the
request from buffer memory parameters that the master module
parameters (Y0006). has written to the buffer memory using
X07 Data link startup buffer memory the TO command.
parameter normal completion
becomes ON when the startup has
completed with an error after Data link
startup request from buffer memory
parameters (Y0006).
X08 Data link startup by EEPROM Y08 Data link startup request from the
parameter normal completion EEPROM parameters turns X8 ON
X09 Data link startup by EEPROM when it succeeded and turn X9 ON
parameter error completion when it failed. The EEPROM
parameters are used.
X0A Parameter registration to EEPROM Y0A Parameter registration request to
normal completion EEPROM turns XA ON when the write
X0B Parameter registration to EEPROM process succeeded and turns XB OFF
error completion when it failed.
X0F Module ready
becomes ON when the master
module is in ready state. It becomes
OFF when there is a failure and the
module cannot operate.
CAUTION
Refer to the user manual of the master module for the details regarding the input
and output signals (X, Y) of the master module.

OPTION CFC-201
(7) Startup Parameters of the Master module

The startup of CC-Link needs a program to register the startup parameters to the master
module. The startup parameters are the number of modules (the number of indicators), the
information of the ID stations, and the parameters listed below to connect to the link. Register
the parameters with the TO command. Refer to the reference circuit of the startup program for
details.
Address Item Default Description

01H Number of 64 The number of remote and local station units to connect to
connected the master station. The station information exceeding this
modules number is not connected even if it is set as a unit to
connect.
02H Number of retries 3 The number of times to retry (1 to 7 times) when there is a
communication error. It will be an error station when the
communication cannot be recovered after the retries of this
number of times.
03H Operation 0 The link will continue even if the CPU is down when this
specification when address is set to "1".
CPU is down
10H to 13H Reserved station 0 The addresses are set by four words. The unit having the
specification ID number corresponding to the bit that is ON will be
excluded from the link including the detection of error.
14H to 17H Error invalid 0 The addresses are set by four words. The communication
station will continue if the station has the ID number
specification corresponding to the bit that is ON, but the error will be
ignored.
20H to Station 0 The starting ID number, the number of owning stations
5FH information and the unit type of the units to connect to the link are
Note1) registered to this address. The station information of the
number of connections will be available.
１４０１
Starting ID number (2-digit HEX)

Number of owning stations (1 to 4)
Unit type
0= remote I/O
1= remote device (the indicator)
2= intelligent
Note1: e.g. the setting of the station information will be as below when 16 indicators are connected.
Number of Station Number of Station

Address Address
connections information connections information
1 0020H 1401H 9 0028H 1421H
2 0021H 1405H 10 0029H 1425H
3 0022H 1409H 11 002AH 1429H
4 0023H 140DH 12 002BH 142DH
5 0024H 1411H 13 002CH 1431H
6 0025H 1415H 14 002DH 1435H
7 0026H 1419H 15 002EH 1439H
8 0027H 141DH 16 002FH 143DH
CAUTION
Refer to the user manual of the master module for the details regarding the
startup parameters of the master module.

OPTION CFC-201
(8) Description of the Startup Parameters

The process of the startup and execution programs of CC-Link is as below:
CPU of the sequencer Master module Indicator
Turn on the power Turn on the power
Module error (X0)

Module ready (XF)
(1) Check if the master module is
normal
X0000=OFF
X000F=ON
(2) Set the startup parameter
[TO …….]
(3) Enable the output bit
[SET Y0000]
(4) Set the startup request
[SET Y0006]
(performs the startup) Startup data
X0006 will be ON when link
the startup succeeded.
Start the link
(5) Reset the startup request
[RST Y0006]
(6) Execute the link
Buffer memory
Internal memory [FROM ……] Output of the
indicator
[TO ……] Input to the
indicator

OPTION CFC-201
(9) Startup Program

(1) The following example of the sequencer program can connect one indicator with CC-Link.
(2) In this program, the indicator is set to the station ID number 1, and the master module is
placed at the start of the base unit (X0000). Only the indicator is connected with CC-link.
(3) To connect other cases, refer to the user manual of the master module. The below
example is using A1SCPU.
X0000 X000F
( M 0200 ) Write setting
Module error Module ready permission
M0200 M0202
( M 0201 ) Write setting request
Write enabled Write completed
M001 H H K K When the number of

TO 0000 0001 1 1 units connected is
Write "1"
request H H H K
TO 0000 0020 1401 1 Station information of
indicator (number of
units connected)
SET Y0000 Refresh specification
SET M0202 Write setting

completion
M0210 M0220 M0211
SET Y0006 Data Link startup by
Data link startup Data link Waiting for data EEPROM param
request startup link startup (to master unit)
(user condition) completion SET M0211 Waiting for link
startup completion
RST M0210 Reset of Link startup

request (user condition)
M0211 M0006
RST Y0006 Reset of Data link
Waiting for Data link startup normal startup by EEPROM
link start-up (from master unit)
completion RST M0211 Reset of waiting for
link startup completion
SET M0220 Data link startup

(link normal)
X0007
RST Y0006 Reset of Data link
Data link startup buffer memory start-up by EEPROM
parameter error (from master unit)
RST M0211 Reset of waiting for
link start-up completion
RST M0220 Data link startup error
CAUTION
Note that the above figure is an example. Use an appropriate sequence circuit
depending on the system.

OPTION CFC-201
(10) Program
1) Read the Control Output of the Indicator (remote bit input)
The FROM command allows reading the control output of the indicator using CC-Link, and the
buffer memory of the master module will be read to the internal devices (M, B, etc). The below
example reads the control output of the indicator ID number 1 to the B device, and outputs the
indication lamp (Y0040) with the weighing signal (B0011).
M0220 H H K4 K
FROM 0000 00E0 B0000 8 Reading from
Data Link start-up buffer memory
B0011 Indication
Y0040 lamp output
Weighing
Address ID Address Bit Device Signal

B0000 1 00E0 0 RX0000 Write weighing setting value response
1 1 RX0001 Read weighing result response
2 2 RX0002 General command response
3 3 RX0003 Write [0] / read [1] selection response
4 4 RX0004 Operation mode switch response
5 5 RX0005
6 6 RX0006 CPU normal operation
7 7 RX0007 Word [0] / bit [1] selection response
8 8 RX0008 General command auxiliary number response
9 9 RX0009 General command auxiliary number response
A A RX000A General command auxiliary number response
B B RX000B General command auxiliary number response
C C RX000C
D D RX000D
E E RX000E
B000F F RX000F
B0010 00E1 0 RX0010 System ready
1 1 RX0011 Weighing
2 2 RX0012 W-operation
3 3 RX0013 Calibrating
4 4 RX0014 Adjustment operation
5 FROM 5 RX0015 Automatic operation
6 command 6 RX0016 Compensation completion
7 7 RX0017 External selection
8 8 RX0018 Deviation upper / lower limit1
9 9 RX0019 Deviation upper / lower limit2
A A RX001A Setting value alarm
B B RX001B Low speed operation
C C RX001C Feed rate upper limit
D D RX001D Feed rate lower limit
E E RX001E CPU operating normally
B001F F RX001F Alarm
B0020 2 00E2 0 to RX0020 (refer to section 3-1)
to 2F F to 002F
B0030 00E3 0 to RX0030 (refer to section 3-1)
to 3F F to 003F
B0040 3 00E4 0 to RX0040 Not used
to 4F F to 004F
B0050 00E5 0 to RX0050 Not used
to 5F F to 005F
B0060 4 00E6 0 to RX0060 Not used
to 6F F to 006F
B0070 00E7 0 to RX0070 Not used
to 7F F to 007F
CAUTION
Be sure to not duplicate the allocation of the link register (W, B) when other link
units are set to the sequencer.

OPTION CFC-201
2) Write the Control Input to the Indicator (remote bit output)
The TO command allows writing the control input to the indicator using CC-Link, and the buffer
memory of the master module will be written from the internal devices (M, B, etc). The below
example allocates the operation stop input of the indicator ID number 1 to the B device, and
transmits to the buffer memory.
X0030 Operation
B0110 stop
Operation input command
M0220 H H K4 K
TO 0000 0160 B0100 8 Writing to
Startup buffer memory
Address ID Address Bit Device Signal

B0100 1 0160 0 RX0000 Write weighing setting value request
1 1 RX0001 Read weighing result request
2 2 RX0002 General command request
3 3 RX0003 Write [0] / read [1] selection
4 4 RX0004 Operation mode switch request
5 5 RX0005
6 6 RX0006
7 7 RX0007 Word [0] / bit [1] selection
8 8 RX0008 General command auxiliary number request
9 9 RX0009 General command auxiliary number request
A A RX000A General command auxiliary number request
B B RX000B General command auxiliary number request
C C RX000C
D D RX000D
E E RX000E
B010F F RX000F
B0110 0161 0 RX0010 Operation stop
1 1 RX0011 External selection
2 2 RX0012 Totalizer value reset
3 3 RX0013 Check weight zero position
TO
4 4 RX0014 Deviation reset
command
5 5 RX0015 Setting value hold
6 6 RX0016 Automatic operation command
7 7 RX0017 Control output hold
8 8 RX0018
9 9 RX0019
A A RX001A
B B RX001B
C C RX001C
D D RX001D
E E RX001E
B011F F RX001F
B0120 2 0162 0 to RX0020 (refer to section 3-2)
to 2F F to 002F
B0130 0163 0 to RX0030 (refer to section 3-2)
to 3F F to 003F
B0140 3 0164 0 to RX0040 Not used
to 4F F to 004F
B0150 0165 0 to RX0050 Not used
to 5F F to 005F
B0160 4 0166 0 to RX0060 Not used
to 6F F to 006F
B0170 0167 0 to RX0070 Not used
to 7F F to 007F
CAUTION

OPTION CFC-201
3) Read the Feed Rate from the Indicator (word input)
The FROM command allows reading the feed rate data from the indicator using CC-Link, and
the buffer memory of the master module will be read to the internal devices (D, W, etc). The
below example reads the feed rate data of the indicator ID number 1 to D220 of the W device.
M0220 H H K
FROM 0000 02E0 W0000 16 Reading
Data link startup from buffer
memory
M....
DMOV W0002 D0220 Read to
Feed rate D220
read condition
Address ID Address Device Signal

W0000 1 02E0 RWr0000 Totalized value (lower bit) (O1)
1 1 RWr0001 (upper bit)
2 2 RWr0002 Feed rate (lower bit) (O2)
4 2 02E4 RWr0004 Setting value (lower bit) (O3)
6 6 RWr0006 Load rate (O4)
FROM
7 command
7 RWr0007 Speed (O5)
8 3 02E8 RWr0008 Control output (O6)
9 9 RWr0009 External independent (O7)
A A RWr000A External ratio (O8)
B B RWr000B External moisture (O9)
C 4 02EC RWr000C General data response (lower bit)
D D RWr000D (upper bit)
E E RWr000E Command number response
W000F F RWr000F Operation mode response
CAUTION

OPTION CFC-201
4) Write the Setting Value to the Indicator (write weighing setting value request)
The setting of the external independent can be made by only writing the data to the area I3. The
data written to this area will be written to the indicator within 100ms.
CAUTION
Be sure to set "0" to the addresses 70-4 and 71-1 before setting the external
independent, the external ratio and the external moisture so that these settings
are not input by analog and pulse methods.
M.... When
MOV D0100 W0004 independent is
Feed rate set to D100
write condition
M0220 H H K
TO 0000 01E0 W0000 16 Write to buffer
Data link startup memory
Address ID Address Device Signal

W0010 1 01E0 RWw0000 (I1)
1 1 RWw0001
2 2 RWw0002 (I2)
3 3 RWw0003
4 2 01E4 RWw0004 External independent (I3)
5 5 RWw0005 (I4)
6 6 RWw0006 (I5)
7 TO 7 RWw0007 (I6)
8 command 3 01E8 RWw0008 (I7)
9 9 RWw0009
A A RWw000A (I8)
B B RWw000B
C 4 01EC RWw000C General data (lower bit)
D D RWw000D (upper bit)
E E RWw000E Command number
W001F F RWw000F Operation mode
CAUTION

OPTION CFC-201
5) Write Data Specifying the Command to the Indicator
Command No. SEQ →CFC

(RWw000E)
General data
SEQ →CFC
(RWw000C,D)
Word/Bit selection
(RY0007) SEQ →CFC
Write/Read selection
SEQ →CFC
(RY0003)
General command request SEQ →CFC

(RY0002)
Command no response SEQ ←CFC
(RWr000E)
General data response SEQ ←CFC

(RWr000C,D)
Word/Bit selection
response (RX0007) SEQ ←CFC
General command
1) The Command no. (RWw000E), the General data (RWw000C, RWw000D), the Word/Bit
selection (RY0007) and the Write/Read selection (RY0003) are set from the sequencer.
2) Turn the General command request (RY0002) ON.
3) The indicator reads the Command no., the General data, the Word/Bit selection, the
Write/Read selection, and updates the setting values.
4) The indicator sets the Command no. response (RWr000E), the General data (RWw000C,
RWw000D), the Word/Bit selection response (RX0007) and the Write/Read selection
(RX0003).
5) The General command response (RX0002) will be ON. Turn OFF the General command
request.

OPTION CFC-201
Signal Name Transmission Device no. Function

This signal sets the data number of the data to write
Command no. PLC→CFC RWw000E
with general data.
RWw000C This signal sets the data to write. (32 bit signed
General data PLC→CFC
RWw000D binary)
Word/Bit Leave this signal OFF all the time. This is for future
PLC→CFC RY0007
selection extension.
General Leave this signal OFF all the time. This is for future
command RY0008 to extension.
PLC→CFC
auxiliary no. 000B
request
Write/Read This signal selects whether the sequencer writes or
PLC→CFC RY0003
selection reads. OFF: write ON: read
This signal allows the sequencer requesting the
General read or write process with the general command to
command PLC→CFC RY0002 the indicator. This request will be OFF when the
request response of the general command from the indicator
is ON.
This signal sets the command no. specified from the
Command no.
PLC←CFC RWr000E sequencer. "-1" will be set when the command no. is
Response
not available.
RWr000C This signal sets the general data written from the
General data
PLC←CFC sequencer. "-1" will be set when there is an error in
response RWr000D
the write process.
selection PLC←CFC RX0007 extension.
response
command RX0008 to extension.
PLC←CFC
auxiliary no. 000B
request
Write/Read This signal sets the Write/Read selection signal
selection PLC←CFC RX0003 specified from the sequencer.
response
This signal will read the general data when the
General
general command request is ON, and will become
command PLC←CFC RX0002
ON after the process. This signal becomes OFF
response
when the general command request is OFF.

OPTION CFC-201
6) Read Data Specifying the Command to the Indicator
Command No.
(RWw000E) SE Q →CFC
Word/Bit selection
(RY0007) SEQ → CF C
(RY0003) SE Q →CFC
General command
request (RY0002) SE Q →CFC
Command no. response

(RWr000E) S EQ ←CFC
General data response

(RWr000C,D) SEQ ← CFC
Word/Bit selection
response (RX0003) SEQ ←C FC
General command
response (RX0002) SEQ ←C FC
1) The Command no. (RWw000E), the Word/Bit selection (RY0007) and the Write/Read
selection (RY0003) are set from the sequencer.
2) Turn the General command request (RY0002) ON.
3) The indicator reads the Command no., the General data and the Word/Bit selection, and
then sets the Command no. response (RWr000E), the General data (RWr000C, RWr000D),
the Word/Bit selection response (RX0007) and the Write/Read selection (RX0003).
4) The General command response (RX0002) will be ON. Turn OFF the General command
request.

OPTION CFC-201
Signal Name Transmission Device no. Function

This signal sets the data number of the data to write
Command no. PLC→CFC RWw000E
with general data.
PLC→CFC RY0007
selection extension.
command RY0008 to extension.
PLC→CFC
auxiliary no. 000B
request
Write/Read This signal selects whether the sequencer writes or
PLC→CFC RY0003
selection reads. OFF: write ON: read
This signal allows the sequencer requesting the
General read or write process with the general command to
command PLC→CFC RY0002 the indicator. This request will turn OFF when the
request general command response from the indicator is
ON.
This signal sets the command no. specified from the
Command no.
PLC←CFC RWr000E sequencer. "-1" is set when the command no. is not
response
available.
RWr000C This signal sets the general data written from the
General data
PLC←CFC sequencer. "-1" is set when the write process is not
response RWr000D
available.
selection PLC←CFC RX0007 extension.
response
command RX0008 to extension.
PLC←CFC
auxiliary no. 000B
request
Write/Read This signal sets the Write/Read selection signal
selection PLC←CFC RX0003 specified from the sequencer.
response
This signal becomes ON after setting the general
General
data when the general command request of the
command PLC←CFC RX0002
sequencer is ON. This signal becomes OFF when
response
the general command request is OFF.

OPTION CFC-201
(11) Program
a) Timing of the Update of the Data of the Buffer Memory
The indicator updates the data at a time interval of 50ms.
The read and write processes of data on the sequencer program is executed by FROM and TO
commands. Usually perform them once inside the program, although they are performed directly
and asynchronously to the link period and the scan time.
The below table is the formulae of the approximate link time interval when n indicator(s) is
connected. Refer to the manual of the master module for details.
Baud rate Approximate link time interval

Setting Speed (unit: ms, where N= the number of connection)
0 156k 7.76 x N + 5.35
1 625k 1.99 x N + 2.11
2 2.5M 0.50 x N + 1.35
3 5.0M 0.25 x N + 1.23
4 10.0M 0.13 x N + 1.15
b) Transmission Delay Time of the Sequencer and the Indicator

Below are the formulae of the maximum value of the data transmission time from the CPU of the
sequencer to the indicator.
Set the external independent with remote bit output or remote register output:
maximum transmission time = scan time + link interval×2 + 50ms
Set the external overweight or the external upper limit with the remote register output:
maximum transmission time = scan time + link interval×2 + 50ms×2 + 200ms
Below is the formula of the maximum value of the data transmission time from the indicator to
the CPU of the sequencer.
maximum transmission time = scan time + link interval×3 + 50ms
c) Internal Process of the Remote Bit Input

The bit input from the parallel input and CC-Link are used after OR operation.
The input will be ON when either of the parallel input or CC-Link is ON.
The input will be OFF when both the parallel input and CC-Link are OFF.
Parallel
input
Input
OR
process
CC-Link
input
d) Detection of Link Error of the Indicator

When the master module of CC-Link detects a link error to a station, all the bits of the input data
from that station will be off. The indicator will output the System ready signal as a signal to
detect error. This functions as interlock circuit because this contact becomes OFF when there is
a failure to the indicator or a link error.

OPTION CFC-201
e) Communication Error Status
The word data will differ depending on the error (communication error, error of a part of the
stations, error of the entire link) that has occurred.
Status of Received Data of the Master Station at Link Error

Communication error Error of entire link Error of a part of the stations
Bit data (remote to master) All cleared (the data of the corresponding station)
Cleared
Word data (remote to Maintained (the data of the corresponding station)
master) Cleared
Status of Received Data of the Indicator at Link Error

Communication error Error of entire link Error of a part of the stations
Bit data (master to remote) Cleared after detection of error Cleared after detection of error
Word data (master to The setting data do not change since procedures are needed.
remote)
The word data from the remote station may be maintained when there is an error of the entire
link. The System ready signal starts the error process of the remote station when the word data
is used.
Totalized Operation Totalized Operation
value start value end
[D<= W0000 D0012 ] [D> W0000 D0014 ] （ During operation ）
When all the stations have stopped during operation with the above circuit, the signal during
operation will be ON until the re-start of the link. To stop the output when the link has stopped,
add the below circuit.
During System
operation ready (During operation output)
B007B
f) Communication of Data via Link

The buffer commands FROM and TO of the master module are performed during the execution
of the program by interrupting the execution, and do not update at once such as the normal
input and output of the sequencer. Be sure to:
(1) use the FROM command at the start of the program,
(2) update the output with the TO command after all the related internal processes, and
(3) update the output buffer of the same machine simultaneously.

SPECIFICATION CFC-201
Chapter-8 SPECIFICATION
8.1 Specifications
(1) General
Model: CFC-201
Power requirement: AC85 to 264V, 50/60Hz
Power consumption: 20 VA (under individual use)
Refer to “8-4 Power Conversion Table” for the system power
consumption.
Operational temperature: -10 to +50°C
Operational humidity: 45 to 85% R.H (inclusive) without dew condensation
Storage temperature: -20 to +60°C
Storage humidity: 85% R.H or less without dew condensation
Dimensions: 96(W)×144(H)×178(D)
Weight: 1.4 kg
(2) Weighing Accuracy

Analog input full scale: DC30mV
Filter: 2Hz 3 poles
Excitation: DC10V 200mA (Connection available up to 6 load cells)
Remote sensing operation method.
A/D conversion speed: 100 times / sec
Resolution: 400,000 counts / 30mV
Zero drift: ±0.2uV / °C (max.)
Span drift: ±5ppm / °C
Weighing accuracy: Linearity ±0.1%
Control operation interval: 5 times / sec
(3) Display
Feed rate: 4 digits + polarity. Unit: g/h・kg/h・t/h. Character height: 10mm
Status indicator: Weighing, adjust mode, feed rate alarm, load rate alarm, speed
alarm, deviation alarm or setting value alarm
Message: 10 digits 5×7 dot characters, displays the weighing status, the
settings and the errors.
Monitor: Max. 12 digits 7 segments, switches the following to display: the
totalized value (min 10 digits when the default is set), the preset
counter (9 digits), or the deviation (6 digits).
Settings: 15 digits × 3 lines 7 segments, switches the following to display:
the load rate (4 digits), the moisture setting (4 digits), the speed
indicator (level meter + 3 digits), the feed rate setting (4 digits), the
independent setting (4 digits), the ratio (4 digits), the control output
(level meter + 3 digits) and the angle meter (3 digits).

(4) Input Interface

Speed pulse input: Frequency: 40 to 400Hz (maximum frequency), pulse width 1ms or
above.
The power supply for the speed detector: DC6V, 20mA or DC15V,
150mA
Analog setting input: DC4 to 20mA 1 contact (with isolation)
Used to set either of the following: the moisture setting, the
individual setting, the ratio setting or the angle setting.
Pulse string input: Max. 200Hz 1 signal
Used to set either of the following: the individual setting, the ratio
setting, or the moisture setting.
External control input: Input current approx. 3.5mA. Threshold voltage approx. 7V.
Select 8 signals from below: (between parentheses are the default
settings)
a) Operation Control
Operation stop (IN1), External selection (IN2), Z-operation
changeover, S-operation changeover, Adjustment start,
Compensation command, Operate check weight, Low speed
command
b) Status Control
Totalizer value reset (IN3), Check weight zero position (IN4),
Deviation reset (IN5), Setting value hold (IN6), Automatic
operation command (IN7), Control output hold (IN8), key
operation inhibit, Reset preset counter
(5) Output Interface

Analog output: 2 signals (with isolation) as follows:
1) DC4 to 20mA (load resistance below or equal 500Ω).
2) DC4 to 20mA (load resistance below or equal 500Ω) and DC0 to
10V (load resistance more than 1KΩ inclusive) available by
switching.
Used to one of the following: the feed rate, the load ratio, or the
control output.
Output accuracy: 1/1000.
Pulse output: a) Totalize (slow) pulse
Pulse width 10 to 1000ms
Photomos relay AC264V DC125V 0.1A below or equal 10Hz
b) Positive and negative (fast) pulse
Pulse width 4 to 1000ms
Open collector Max. DC30V 100mA below or equal 125Hz
The change to FI pulse is available.

External control output: a) Relay output
4 contacts
contact rating AC 250V 1A DC 30V 1A
b) Open collector output
16 signals
contact rating DC30V 100mA max.
Select from the following signals (between parentheses are the
default settings
Alarm signal:
Load rate upper limit, Load rate lower limit, Load rate
upper and lower limit (Ry4), Feed rate upper limit
(OUT13), Feed rate lower limit (OUT14), Feed rate upper
and lower limit (Ry2), Speed upper limit, Speed lower
limit, Speed upper and lower limit (Ry3), Deviation upper
and lower limit1 (OUT9), Deviation upper and lower limit2
(OUT10), Setting value upper limit, Setting value lower
limit, Setting value upper and lower limit (OUT11), Alarm
(OR operation of all the alarms, (OUT16))
Operating status:
System ready (OUT1), Weighing (OUT2), W-operation
(OUT3), Calibrating (OUT4), Adjustment operation
(OUT5), Lower check weight (Ry1), Automatic operation
(OUT6), Compensation completion (OUT7), External
selection (OUT8), CPU operating normally (OUT15), Low
speed operation (OUT12), increment preset counter.
(6) Serial Input/Output

RS232C: 2 ports
RS232C/RS422 changeover: 1 port
Communication: Bidirectional half-duplex
Baud rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bps
Supported format:
a) Communication with the sequencer: Mitsubishi sequencer serial communication
unit (dedicated protocol format 4), Omron sequencer higher-level link unit
b) Printing of the internal parameter to the printer
c) CFC100 compatible format
d) Yamato communication format
USB host port: 1 port
Communication: Bidirectional half-duplex
Baud rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bps
(7) Others
Power failure protection: 10 years (battery backup)
(8) Option
DA relay output extension board (EV567F): refer to Chapter7
CCLINK interface board (EV569F): refer to Chapter7
Dedicated cables: for load cell: EJ750-60 2m, EJ750-70 5m
for input/output signal: ER968-30 3m, ER968-50 5m
for serial: ER969-50 5m
Current transducer board (EV459): converts 4-20mA current signals to 5-25V voltage signals.

8.2 OUTER VIEW

Panel surface
36
　　　　　　ＣＦＣ－２０1
ＯＰＣＬＢＦＬＳＤＳＥＴ
kg
ＤＥＶ
t /h
144
P7 P8 P9
P4 P5 P6
ＥｘＡｄｊ．４５６
P1 P2 P3
１２３
P0
Ｆ１ＬＯＣＫ０ＣＥＮＴ
96 15 162.6 34
CON1 OP1 OP2
+0.5
0
CN2
F-CN1
138
POWER
８７６５４３２１
CN3
AC85 ～264V
Ｌ
92 +0.5
0
Ｎ Panel cutout dimension

ＰＥ
8.3 Internal Configuration Drawing
CN 4 Option board
CN 1 CN 5
pulse analog
input/output
connector (28)
Display board Conveyor IO board
ＥＶ１０５３Ｆ CN3
ＥＶ５７０Ｆ relay output
terminal board (8)
load cell connector
Mo th er
bo ar d C N1 (8)
ＥＶ１０５２ C ON1
Film keypad
Main board
C N2 CN 4 CN 2 serial connector (20)
CN3
ＥＶ１０５１Ｆ
control input/output
C N4 C N3 connector (20)
CN 2 CN 6 Power source board

C N1
ＥＶ５６６（ＰＳ５０２７）

8.4 Power Consumption Table

Power
NOTES
consumption
Basic unit 20 [VA] (the indicator used individually)
Per 1 load cell 1.5 [VA] The necessary connection(s) added to
the basic unit
EV567F 15 [VA] Added to the basic unit

Option
EV569F 7 [VA] Added to the basic unit
8.5 Data Label

Application
Label Data Address
Data Name Note Modification Bit
Name No. Setting
AB50 9050 OR output1 Yes

AW16 9016 conveyor scale mode 996
AW17 9017 model code (major class) 982
AW34 9034 device control no. Disabled 982
AW35 9035 program version Disabled 981
AW36 9036 serial no. 983
AW40 9040 external setting input type 991
AW41 9041 modification attribute 992
AW42 9042 Language 993
AW43 9043 test output 994
AW44 9044 feed rate display 053
AW5A 90510 OR output1 original signal1 521
AW5B 90511 OR output1 original signal2 522
AW5C 90512 OR output1 original signal3 523
AW5D 90513 OR output1 original signal4 524
AW5E 90514 OR output1 original signal5 525
AW5F 90515 OR output1 original signal6 526
AW5I 90516 OR output2 original signal1 531
AW5J 90517 OR output2 original signal2 532
AW5K 90518 OR output2 original signal3 533
AW5L 90519 OR output2 original signal4 534
AW5M 90520 OR output2 original signal5 535
AW5N 90521 OR output2 original signal6 536
AW5Q 90522 OR output3 original signal1 541
AW5R 90523 OR output3 original signal2 542
AW5S 90524 OR output3 original signal3 543
AW5T 90525 OR output3 original signal4 544
AW5U 90526 OR output3 original signal5 545
AW5V 90527 OR output3 original signal6 546
AW79 9079 control input/output special setting 303
Character
Internal
Label Data
Data Name Note Modification Bit Setting
Name No.
Address
CW60 4060 baud rate NOTE1) 401,411,421
CW61 4061 bit size NOTE1) 402,412,422
CW62 4062 control procedure NOTE1) 403,413,423
NOTE1) The serial port1 is specified by the serial no.0, the serial port2 by the serial no.1, and the serial port3 by the serial no.2.
CC-LINK
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
cB00 6500 RUN LED status Disabled yes
cB01 6501 error LED status Disabled yes
cW10 6510 current station ID no. NOTE1) Disabled
cW11 6511 baud rate switch NOTE2) Disabled
cW12 6512 owning station no NOTE3) Disabled
cW13 6513 supplier code NOTE4) Disabled
cW14 6514 model code NOTE5) Disabled
cW15 6515 Version Disabled
cW16 6516 error information Disabled
cW17 6517 IC version Disabled
cW30 6530 mode register setting 701
cW31 6531 individual receiving (long) area definition 702
cW32 6532 individual receiving (word) area definition 703
cW33 6533 individual sending (long) area definition 704
cW34 6534 individual sending (word) area definition 705
cW40 6540 receiving bit_1 711
cW46 6546 transmission bit_1 721
cW60 6560 receiving word_1 731
cW80 6580 transmission word_1 751
NOTE1) The station ID no. set with the station ID no. setting switch will be displayed.
NOTE2) The baud rate is output in MHz.
NOTE3) The owning ID numbers is all the time 4.
NOTE4) 258 (102H) is displayed as supplier code.
NOTE5) 51 (33H) is displayed as model code.

Error
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
eB00 9500 breakdown Disabled yes
eB01 9501 alarm Disabled yes
eB10 9510 system ready Disabled yes
eB12 9512 permanently ON Disabled yes
eB13 9513 permanently OFF Disabled yes
eB19 9519 0.1sec-flicker Disabled yes
eB21 9521 0.2sec-flicker Disabled yes
eB23 9523 1sec-flicker Disabled yes
eB25 9525 CPU in operation (0.5sec-flicker) Disabled yes
eB30 9530 suspended by error yes
eW00 9500 current error code Disabled
eW01 9501 current error auxiliary code Disabled
eW02 9502 error level Disabled
NOTE1) At the EDI compatible communication, the internal setting address 45 is specified by the serial no.0 and the
address 46 by the serial no.1.
CFC100 Compatible Communication
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
GW20 4720 protocol setting 451, 461
GW21 4721 format detail1 452, 462
Error History
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
hW00 9400 latest pointer loacation NOTE1)
hW01 9401 last pointer location NOTE1)
hW02 9402 pointer +1 NOTE1)
hW03 9403 pointer -1 NOTE1)
hW04 9404 pointer move relative
hW05 9405 pointer move direct
hW10 9410 history number NOTE2)
hW11 9411 error code NOTE3) Disabled
hW12 9412 Level NOTE4) Disabled
hW13 9413 current point percent
hW30 9430 total error number Disabled
hW40 9440 initializing progress (approx) NOTE5)
hW41 9441 initializing progress (detail %) NOTE6) Disabled
hW42 9442 initialize result (error code) Disabled
hW43 9443 initialize result (address) Disabled
hs10 none history number Disabled
hs11 none code + level NOTE7) Disabled
hs13 none error name Disabled
hs14 none error occuring time NOTE8) Disabled
hs15 none error ending time Disabled
NOTE1) Ignored even when the writing data is specified.
NOTE2) Returns the current specified history number.
NOTE3) Returns in 32 bit Hex. For example, 12345678H is as follows. 1234: error no. 5: error serial no.
678: auxiliary no.
NOTE4) 0: minor failure 1: alert 2: fatal failure
NOTE5) The initialization starts when 1 is written. The error code 9430 Invalid Initialization Request is returned
when a request is made during the initialization. The result is returned at the read process. 0: normal
state 1: request 2: initializing 3: normal termination 4: error termination.
NOTE6) The progress of the initialization is returned. 100 is returned when the initialization terminates within 1
to 100.
NOTE7) Returns in the format “Err12-34△5△678A”. 12-34: error code 5: serial no. 678: error auxiliary
no. A: error level (A:fatal failure, B:alert, C:minor failure).
NOTE8) Returns in the format “01.08.20△15.20.31” when it means August 20, 2007, 15:30:31.
Conveyor Scale data
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
iB11 311 Z-operation changeover Yes
iB12 312 S-operation changeover Yes
iB15 315 Adjustment start Yes
iB16 316 Compensation command Yes
iB17 317 External selection Yes
iB21 321 Totalizer value reset Yes
iB23 323 Reset pre-set counter Yes
iB26 326 Operation stop Yes
iB27 327 Setting value hold Yes
iB28 328 Check weight zero position Yes
iB29 329 Operate check weight Yes
iB48 348 Low-speed command Yes
iB80 380 Load cell deviation Yes
iB81 381 Volumetric switch Yes
iB82 382 Reset volumetric hold input Yes
iB30 330 Load rate lower limit Disabled Yes
iB31 331 Load rate upper limit Disabled Yes
iB32 332 Feed rate lower limit Disabled Yes
iB33 333 Feed rate upper limit Disabled Yes
iB34 334 Speed lower limit Disabled Yes
iB35 335 Speed upper limit Disabled Yes
iB36 336 Adjustment operation Disabled Yes
iB37 337 W-operation Disabled Yes
iB38 338 Lower check weight Disabled Yes
iB39 339 Weighing Disabled Yes
iB40 340 Calibrating Disabled Yes
iB41 341 Alarm Disabled Yes
iB42 342 Compensation completion Disabled Yes
iB43 343 Load rate upper / lower limit Disabled Yes
iB44 344 Feed rate upper / lower limit Disabled Yes
iB45 345 Speed upper / lower limit Disabled Yes
iB46 346 Preset counter output Disabled Yes
iB47 347 External selection Disabled Yes
iB60 360 Low speed operation Disabled Yes
iB61 361 During volumetric Disabled Yes
iB62 362 Weight volumetric Disabled Yes
iB63 363 Speed volumetric Disabled Yes

Label Data Address

Name No. Setting
iW03 303 span coefficient1 082

iW04 304 span coefficient2 083
iW07 307 internal weight unit 024
iW08 308 internal weight decimal point 025
iW09 309 near zero 036
iW11 311 update time of feed rate average 016
iW12 312 check weight zero position 051
iW13 313 check weight operation 052
iW14 314 volumetric enabled 191
iW15 315 changeover input mode 192
iW16 316 maintain mode 193
iW17 317 preset counter 161
iW19 319 average sensitivity 015
iW1A ------ zero adjustment range 095
iW1B ------ span adjustment range 096
iW20 320 external changeover mode 041
iW21 321 initial 081
iW23 323 setting mode 111
iW24 324 moisture 112
iW25 325 load rate lower limit % 032
iW26 326 load rate upper limit % 031
iW27 327 lower limit 012
iW28 328 upper limit 011
iW29 329 speed meter lower limit % 062
iW2A ------ alarm timer 013
iW2B ------ alarm timer 033
iW2D ------ alarm timer 063
iW2E ------ external adjustment mode 042
iW30 330 speed meter upper limit % 061
iW31 331 load rate span 035
iW32 332 maximum capacity 004
iW33 333 span reference 072
iW34 334 target pulse 071
iW35 335 S-operation adjustment value 073
iW36 336 display unit 001
iW37 337 totalizer moisture 113
iW38 338 Load rate with limiter(10000 when load rate
Disabled
is 100%)
iW39 339 displayed decimal point position 002
iW3A ------ Adjustment time 094
iW3B ------ load rate display 581
iW3C ------ load cell output value 582
iW3D ------ load rate upper limit limiter 583
iW3E ------ load rate lower limit limiter 584
iW40 340 display scale interval 003
iW41 341 speed error detection time 196
iW42 342 display scale interval 023
iW43 343 rated frequency 064
iW44 344 speed input selection 065
iW45 345 totalized pulse input weight 066
iW46 346 average time 194

Label Data Address

Name No. Setting
iW47 347 bulk density reference 195

iW48 348 pulse mode 771
iW49 349 pulse weight 772
iW4A ------ Display unit 021
iW4B ------ displayed decimal point position 022
iW4G ------ Integral number of rotations 091
iW4H ------ belt length 092
iW4I ------ weight per unit length 093
iW50 350 maximum moisture 114
iW51 351 moisture mode 774
iW52 352 pulse weight 781
iW54 354 moisture mode 783
iW55 355 Remote adjustment short mode 044
iW5A ------ span reference value 272
iW5a ------ Display unit 371
iW5B ------ target pulse 271
iW5b ------ displayed decimal point position 372
iW5C ------ S-operation adjustment value 273
iW5c ------ Display scale interval 373
iW5D ------ Initial 281
iW5d ------ maximum capacity 374
iW5E ------ span coefficient1 282
iW5e ------ feed rate upper limit 381
iW5F ------ span coefficient2 283
iW5f ------ feed rate upper limit 382
iW5G ------ integral number of rotations 291
iW5g ------ alarm timer 383
iW5H ------ belt length 292
iW5I ------ weight per unit length 293
iW5J ------ adjustment time 294
iW5k ------ speed meter upper limit % 391
iW5l ------ speed meter lower limit % 392
iW5M ------ span compensation at actual weight 054
iW5m ------ alarm timer 393
iW5N ------ span compensation at actual weight 295
iW5n ------ rated frequency 394
iW61 361 Totalizer(display value) Disabled
iW62 362 Speed(display value (Hz)) Disabled
Speed rate(10000 when = to rated
iW63 363 Disabled
frequency)
iW64 364 Load rate(10000 when load rate is 100%) Disabled
Feed rate without average(10000 at
iW65 365 Disabled
maximum capacity)
External moisture(10000 when moisture is
iW67 367
100%)

abel Data Address

Name No. Setting
External moisture (reverse)(10000 when

iW76 376 Disabled
moisture is 0 %)
iW80 380 operation stop timer 101
iW81 381 alarm operation timer 102
Feed rate (high reference)(10000 when high
iW82 382 Disabled
op is max capacity)
iW83 383 Load rate(10000 when load rate is 100%) Disabled
iW84 384 Feed rate(10000 at maximum capacity) Disabled
iW86 386 Feed rate(display value) Disabled
iW88 388 adjustment selection 206
Update time feed rate(10000 at maximum
iW89 389 Disabled
capacity)
iW92 392 Target feed rate(display value) Disabled
iW94 394 Moisture(10000 when moisture is 100%) Disabled
iW96 396 Ratio(10000 when ratio is 100%) Disabled
iW98 398 reference length 571
iWL0 linearization permission 481
iWL1 linearization of 0% 482
iWLA linearization of 90% 495
iWLB linearization of 100% 496
AD Self-Diagnosis
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
JW01 301 current temperature Disabled
JW20 320 AD before temperature calibration Disabled
JW21 321 AD after temperature calibration Disabled
JW22 322 sub AD1 (sensing) Disabled
JW23 323 sub AD2 (temperature gage) Disabled
JW24 324 sub AD3 (CALIB) Disabled
JW28 328 AD after calculating span0 Disabled

Constant Feed Weigher

Label Data Address
Name No. Setting
kB20 1720 Deviation reset Yes

kB21 1721 Control output hold Yes
kB22 1722 Automatic operation command Yes
kB30 1730 Automatic operation Yes
kB32 1732 Deviation upper / lower limit 1 Yes
kB33 1733 Deviation upper / lower limit 2 Yes
kB34 1734 Setting value lower limit Yes
kB35 1735 Setting value upper limit Yes
kB36 1736 Setting value upper / lower limit Yes
kB60 1760 External automatic Yes
kB61 1761 Control output lower limiter on Yes
kW11 1711 control method 141
kW12 1712 Kp constant 142
kW13 1713 Ti constant 143
kW14 1714 α constant 144
kW16 1716 automatic operation mode 043
kW20 1720 setting method 156
kW21 1721 setting mode 121
kW22 1722 scale interval 153
kW23 1723 setting reference 155
kW24 1724 maximum ratio 122
kW30 1727 reference 171
kW31 1728 upper/lower limit value1 172
kW33 1729 control output limiter upper limit 181
kW34 1730 control output limiter lower limit 182
kW35 1731 alarm timer1 173
kW36 1733 upper/lower limit value2 174
kW37 1734 alarm timer2 175
kW38 1735 hold setting 154
kW39 1736 initial control output 145
kW40 1736 feed rate setting lower limit 151
kW41 1738 alarm timer 152
kW42 1739 setting reference 375
kW43 1740 Kp constant 361
kW44 1741 Ti constant 362
kW45 1742 α constant 363
kW46 1743 setting value lower limit 376
kW47 1744 maximum ratio at low stage operation 364

Angle Meter
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
LW00 2620 adjustment angle samples 205
LW01 2621 adjustment range 225
LW02 2625 reference sample number 226
LW20 2626 reference angle input1 202
LW21 2630 reference angle input2 204
LW25 2631 reference angle1 201
LW26 2632 reference angle2 203
LW30 2633 angle sample1 211
LW40 2643 zero adjustment sample1 231
LW50 2653 span adjustment sample1 251

Printer
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
PB00 5000 individual weight print command yes
PB01 5001 sub total print command yes
PB02 5002 grand total print command yes
PB03 5003 data print command yes
PB04 5004 print with red ink yes
PB05 5005 title printing yes
PB05 5005 printing Disabled yes
PW40 5040 format selection 501
PW42 5042 guide print 503
PW43 5043 sub total and count clear 504
PW44 5044 time for wating after print 505
Printer
Printing
Label Data
Name No.
Address
individual print line feed after title
PW51 5051 001
printing
PW52 5052 line feed after individual print 002
PW53 5053 weight unit for individual print 003
individual print title printing line1
PW54 5054 011
datalabel1
PW55 5055 012
datalabel2
PW56 5056 013
datalabel3
individual print title printing line1 data1
PW57 5057 014
print position
PW58 5058 015
print position
PW59 5059 016
print position

Printer
Printing
Label Data
Name No.
Address
PW5: 50510 021
datalabel1
PW5; 50511 022
datalabel2
PW5< 50512 023
datalabel3
PW5= 50513 024
print position
PW5> 50514 025
print position
PW5? 50515 026
print position
PW5@ 50516 031
datalabel1
PW5A 50517 032
datalabel2
PW5B 50518 033
datalabel3
PW5C 50519 034
print position
PW5D 50520 035
print position
PW5E 50521 036
print position
PW5F 50522 individual print line1 datalabel1 041
PW5G 50523 individual print line1 datalabel2 042
PW5H 50524 individual print line1 datalabel3 043
PW5I 50525 individual print line1 data1 print position 044
PW5J 50526 individual print line1 data2 print position 045
PW5K 50527 individual print line1 data3 print position 046
PW5L 50528 individual print line2 datalabel1 051
PW5M 50529 individual print line2 datalabel2 052
PW5N 50530 individual print line2 datalabel3 053
PW5O 50531 individual print line2 data1 print position 054
PW5P 50532 individual print line2 data2 print position 055
PW5Q 50533 individual print line2 data3 print position 056
PW5R 50534 individual print line3 datalabel1 061
PW5S 50535 individual print line3 datalabel2 062
PW5T 50536 individual print line3 datalabel3 063
PW5U 50537 individual print line3 data1 print position 064
PW5V 50538 individual print line3 data2 print position 065
PW5W 50539 individual print line3 data3 print position 066
PW62 5062 line feed before sub total print 101
PW63 5063 line feed after sub total print 102
PW64 5064 weight unit for sub total print 103
PW6G 50623 sub total print line1 datalabel1 111
PW6H 50624 sub total print line1 datalabel2 112
PW6I 50625 sub total print line1 datalabel3 113
PW6J 50626 sub total print line1 data1 print position 114
PW6K 50627 sub total print line1 data2 print position 115
PW6L 50628 sub total print line1 data3 print position 116
PW6M 50629 sub total print line2 datalabel1 121
PW6N 50630 sub total print line2 datalabel2 122
PW6O 50631 sub total print line2 datalabel3 123

Printer
Printing
Label Data
Name No.
Address
PW6P 50632 sub total print line2 data1 print position 124
PW6Q 50633 sub total print line2 data2 print position 125
PW6R 50634 sub total print line2 data3 print position 126
PW6S 50635 sub total print line3 datalabel1 131
PW6T 50636 sub total print line3 datalabel2 132
PW6U 50637 sub total print line3 datalabel3 133
PW6V 50638 sub total print line3 data1 print position 134
PW6W 50639 sub total print line3 data2 print position 135
PW6X 50640 sub total print line3 data3 print position 136
PW72 5072 line feed before grand total print 201
PW73 5073 line feed after grand total print 202
PW74 5074 weight unit for grand total print 203
PW7G 50723 grand total print line1 datalabel1 211
PW7H 50724 grand total print line1 datalabel2 212
PW7I 50725 grand total print line1 datalabel3 213
grand total print line1 data1 print
PW7J 50726 214
position
PW7K 50727 215
position
PW7L 50728 216
position
PW7M 50729 grand total print line2 datalabel1 221
PW7N 50730 grand total print line2 datalabel2 222
PW7O 50731 grand total print line2 datalabel3 223
PW7P 50732 224
position
PW7Q 50733 225
position
PW7R 50734 226
position
PW7S 50735 grand total print line3 datalabel1 231
PW7T 50736 grand total print line3 datalabel2 232
PW7U 50737 grand total print line3 datalabel3 233
PW7V 50738 234
position
PW7W 50739 235
position
PW7X 50740 236
position
PW82 5082 line feed before data print 301
PW83 5083 line feed after data print 302
PW84 5084 weight unit for data print 303
PW8G 50823 data print line1 datalabel1 311
PW8H 50824 data print line1 datalabel2 312
PW8I 50825 data print line1 datalabel3 313
PW8J 50826 data print line1 data1 print position 314
PW8K 50827 data print line1 data2 print position 315
PW8L 50828 data print line1 data3 print position 316
PW8M 50829 data print line2 datalabel1 321
PW8N 50830 data print line2 datalabel2 322
PW8O 50831 data print line2 datalabel3 323
PW8P 50832 data print line2 data1 print position 324
PW8Q 50833 data print line2 data2 print position 325
PW8R 50834 data print line2 data3 print position 326

Printer
Printing
Label Data
Name No.
Address
PW8S 50835 data print line3 datalabel1 331
PW8T 50836 data print line3 datalabel2 332
PW8U 50837 data print line3 datalabel3 333
PW8V 50838 data print line3 data1 print position 334
PW8W 50839 data print line3 data2 print position 335
PW8X 50840 data print line3 data3 print position 336
PW8Y 50841 data print line4 datalabel1 341
PW8Z 50842 data print line4 datalabel2 342
PW8[ 50843 data print line4 datalabel3 343
PW8] 50845 data print line4 data1 print position 344
PW8^ 50846 data print line4 data2 print position 345
PW8_ 50847 data print line4 data3 print position 346
PW8` 50848 data print line5 datalabel1 351
PW8a 50849 data print line5 datalabel2 352
PW8b 50850 data print line5 datalabel3 353
PW8d 50852 data print line5 data2 print position 355
PW8e 50853 data print line5 data3 print position 356
PW8f 50854 data print line6 datalabel1 361
PW8g 50855 data print line6 datalabel2 362
PW8h 50856 data print line6 datalabel3 363
PW8i 50857 data print line6 data1 print position 364
PW8j 50858 data print line6 data2 print position 365
PW8k 50859 data print line6 data3 print position 366
PW8l 50860 data print line7 datalabel1 371
PW8m 50861 data print line7 datalabel2 372
PW8n 50862 data print line7 datalabel3 373
PW8o 50863 data print line7 data1 print position 374
PW8p 50864 data print line7 data2 print position 375
PW8q 50865 data print line7 data3 print position 376
PW8r 50866 data print line8 datalabel1 381
PW8s 50867 data print line8 datalabel2 382
PW8t 50868 data print line8 datalabel3 383
PW8u 50869 data print line8 data1 print position 384
PW8v 50870 data print line8 data2 print position 385
PW8w 50871 data print line8 data3 print position 386
PW8x 50872 data print line9 datalabel1 391
PW8y 50873 data print line9 datalabel2 392
PW8z 50874 data print line9 datalabel3 393
PW8{ 50875 data print line9 data1 print position 394
PW8| 50876 data print line9 data2 print position 395
PW8} 50877 data print line9 data3 print position 396
PW90 5090 print lot no.1 (alphanumeric) 401
PW92 5093 print lot no. (numeric) 411
PW93 5094 lot no. length

Sequencer
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
RW60 1160 sample size 141
RW61 1161 reading limit for adjustment 143
RW62 1162 reading dead zone 144
RW63 1163 compensation ratio 142
SW10 6010 bus configuration 602
SW11 6011 computer no. 604
SW12 6012 ID number 603
SW13 6013 support sequencer 601
SW14 6014 EDI ID number 605
SW20 6020 receiving bit device 611
SW21 6021 request receiving word device 612
SW22 6022 every transmission word device 613
SW23 6023 every transmission bit device 614
SW24 6024 requested transmission word device 615
SW25 6025 receiving error bit device 616
SW30 6030 receiving bit device1 621
SW40 6040 request receiving word device1 631
SW60 6060 Request transmission word device1 651

Sequencer
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
SW86 6086 Request transmission bit device1 681
Setting Value Control
Internal
Label
Data No. Data Name Note Modification Bit Setting
Name
Address
TW00 2000 initialize the actual pointer Disabled
TW01 2001 pointer mid classification last page Disabled
TW02 2002 pointer +1 NOTE2) Disabled
TW03 2003 pointer -1 NOTE2) Disabled
TW04 2004 pointer mid classification unit +1 NOTE2) Disabled
TW05 2005 pointer mid classification unit -1 NOTE2) Disabled
TW06 2006 current pointer position NOTE3)
TW07 2007 pointer +-n Disabled
TW10 2010 access mode NOTE4)
TW20 2020 current position setting value
Ts20 none current position setting value
TW22 2022 initialize current position setting value
TW21 2021 current position data label
TW23 2023 current position access mode
TW24 2024 maximum value
TW25 2025 minimum value
TW26 2026 input digit
TW28 2028 zero suppress
TW29 2029 decimal point
TW30 2030 serial number
Ts24 none current position major classification name NOTE5)
Ts25 none current position mid classification name NOTE5)
Ts26 none current position minor classification name NOTE5)
NOTE1) The value to refer can be modified by specifying the serial no. 0:Power failure protecting data, 1:statistic data, 2:dribble
data, 3:internal setting data, 4:product data, 5:printing data.
NOTE2) Returns Err20-30 when it is out of the table area.
NOTE3) Returns Err20-31 when there is no data at the specified location.
NOTE4) The access mode at the initialization is determined by the internal setting 99-1 and 2. To change the access mode, set
first the following. General reference:1 (1H), general write:2 (2H), supervisor reference:65537 (00010001H), supervisor
write:65538 (000 10002H). The reference and the modification of the data cannot be performed if the access mode is
not identical. There is data that cannot be modified at the calibration switch status.
NOTE5) Returns the classification name in string (KATAKANA (Japanese letter) or alphabet character).

Time
Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
tW00 2200 year month day Disabled
tW01 2201 time minute Disabled
Yamato Standard Communication

Internal
Label Data
Name No.
Address
VW00 None transmission timing NOTE2)
VW01 None transmission request NOTE3) Disabled
VW10 None ID number 471
VW20 None output display status NOTE4)
Vs00 None transmission data1 NOTE5)
NOTE1) The modification can be performed when the calibration switch is adjustable.
NOTE2) Writes the transmission timing in ms.
NOTE3) Sends periodically the data of Vs00 to 04. The output is done until the written data value is positive, or when the
data is 0 or negative the output is done until it is suspended. Suspend the output by [ENQ], and clear the
remaining count.
NOTE4) The current display status is output externally by VT100 command. The indicator can be remote by VT100
compatible terminals.
NOTE5) Writes the data to send as a string as follows: label (4 letters) + serial no. (2 letters). The data having label 0 (the
written data is “000000”) is not sent. (“WW0000” for net weight, “tW0100” for time, “tW0000” for date) The
label to write has to be W or B type (numeric) and readable data.
PIO
Label Data Address
Name No. Setting
xW00 IN1 allocation 311

xW20 OUT1 allocation relay output1 signal selection 331, 792, 831
xW24 OUT5 allocation relay output5 signal selection 335, 835
xW25 OUT6 allocation relay output6 signal selection 336, 836
xW26 OUT7 allocation 341

PIO
Label Data Address
Name No. Setting

xW2A OUT11 allocation 345
xW2B OUT12 allocation 346
xW2C OUT13 allocation 351
xW2D OUT14 allocation 352
xW2E OUT15 allocation 353
xW2F OUT16 allocation 354
xW40 control input logic IN1 - IN8 301
xW42 control output logic OUT1 - 16 relay output logic setting 302, 791, 821
Analog Input / Output

Label Data Address
Name No. Setting
!W00 output data 732, 752, 802

!W01 output reference 733, 753, 803
!W02 analog output mode 731, 751, 801
!W03 initial 742, 762, 812
!W04 span 743, 763, 813
!W05 output test 744, 764, 814
!W06 average time 741, 761, 811
!W07 offset 734, 754, 804
"W00 initial 701
"W01 span 702
"W02 average time 703
"W03 analog setting data 704
"W04 input reference value data 705
Pulse Input / Output

Label Data Address
Name No. Setting
$W01 pulse setting data 711

$W02 reference value1 712
$W03 reference value2 713
$W04 average time 714
$W05 status mode 715
%W11 pulse width 773, 782
!W00 output data 732, 752, 802

ANNEX 1 - ADDRESS SETTING CFC-201
Annex 1 - ADDRESS SETTING

The below internal setting is for the supervisor level. At the user level, only the settings of the parameters shown as (u) are available.
Basic Settings of the Operator

00 Feed Rate Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Unit (u) Set the unit of the feed rate. 0: g/min 1: kg/min 2: t/min 3: g/h 4: kg/h 5: t/h 5 0-5
2 Decimal Point (u) Set the position of the decimal point. 0:0000. 1: 000.0 2: 00.00 3: 0.000 1 0-3
3 Scale Interval (u) Set the scale interval of the feed rate. 2 0-7
0: 1 1: 2 2: 5 3: 10 4: 20 5: 50 6: 100 7: 200
4 Maximum Capacity Set the maximum scale capacity of the weighing system. 1200 1 - 99999
5
6
01 Feed Rate Alarm
1 Upper Limit Alarm (u) Set the threshold value (%) of the upper limit alarm of the feed rate. The alarm is output when it 120.0 0 - 99999
exceeds this value. It is not checked when "0" is set.
2 Lower Limit Alarm (u) Set the threshold value (%) of the lower limit alarm of the feed rate. The alarm is output when it is 10.0 0 - 99999
below this value. It is not checked when "0" is set.
3 Timer (u) Set the time allowing the feed rate to be out of the range of the upper and lower limits. The time set 5.0 0 - 999
here will also be the time to reset the alarm after recovering to the range of the said range. The unit
of the timer is in 0.1 second.
4 Average Time (u) Set the average time of the feed rate in the unit of 0.1 second. 2.0 0 - 1000
5 Average Sensitivity (u) Set the average sensitivity in the proportion of the maximum capacity. The sensitivity will change 0 0 - 99
instantaneously when there is a value exceeding this value.
6 Update Interval of Set the update time interval (in second) to calculate the average of the feed rate, when the feed 0 0 - 3600
Average (u) rate varying per the update time is used.
02 Totalizer
1 Unit (u) Set the unit of the totalizer. 0: g 1: kg 2: t 1 0-2
2 Decimal Point (u) Set the position of the decimal point of the totalizer. 0: 0000. 1: 000.0 2: 00.00 3: 0.000 0 0-3
3 Scale Interval (u) Set the scale interval of the totalizer. 3 0-7
0: 1 1: 2 2: 5 3: 10 4: 20 5: 50 6: 100 7: 200
4 Internal Unit Note1) Set the weight unit used internally. 0: g 1: kg 2: t 1 0-2
5 Internal Decimal Point Set the position of the decimal point used internally. 4 3-6
Note1) 3: 0.000 4: 0.0000 5: 0.00000 6: 0.000000
6
Note1: Set the Internal Unit and the Internal Decimal Point using the list below:

Maximum Capacity Maximum Capacity Internal Unit Internal Decimal Point

Weight/h Weight/min (set to address 02-4) (set to address 02-5)
3600 t to 36000 t 60 t to 600 t t (2) 5
360 t to 3600 t 6 t to 60 t kg (1) 3
36 t to 360 t 600 kg to 6 t kg (1) 4
3.6 t to 36 t 60 kg to 600 kg kg (1) 5
360 kg to 3.6 t 6 kg to 60 kg g (0) 3
36 kg to 360 kg 600 g to 6 kg g (0) 4
3.6 kg to 36 kg 60 g to 600 g g (0) 5
0.36 kg to 3.6 kg 6 g to 60 g g (0) 6
03 Load Rate Alarm Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Upper Limit Alarm (u) Set the threshold value of the upper limit alarm of the load rate. 1200 0 - 1999
2 Lower Limit Alarm (u) Set the threshold value of the lower limit alarm of the load rate. 100 0 - 1999
3 Timer (u) Set the time allowing the load rate to be out of the range of the upper and lower limits. The time set 5.0 0 - 999
4 Average Time (u) Set the average time of the load rate in 0.1 second unit. 0.0 0 - 1000
5 Load Rate Span (u) Set the sensitivity of the display of the load rate. Put the test chain on the conveyor belt near 100% 133333 0 - 999999
after zero adjustment, and set the value so that the load value is the value of the test chain.
D  B  C   A (where A% is the test chain value, B% is the load current value, C% is the current
value set to this address, D% is the new value to set to this address)
The value set to this address will be approximately equal to: span input voltage mV   13333
6 Near Zero (u) Set the lowest limit value of the load rate to interrupt the totalizing process. The totalizing process 0.0 0 - 999
will stop when the load rate becomes equal or below the value set here.
04 Remote Operation Switch
1 External Switch Method Select the method to switch to the operation from external way. 0 0-2
1: key input 2: selection by external signal
2 External Adjustment Select how to adjust from external way. 0 0-2
0: inhibit the adjustment from external way
1: selection by external signal 2: always adjust externally
3 Automatic Operation Select the method to switch to the automatic operation. 0 0-2
Method 0: by key operation
1: by Automatic Operation Command signal during the external mode ([Ex] key lamp ON) and by Condition01
key operation during the internal mode ([Ex] key lamp OFF)
2: by Automatic Operation Command signal at anytime
4 Remote Adjustment Select the process of the Zero Adjustment performed from external way. 0 0-1
Mode 0: standard mode, get input of the adjustment writing Condition02
1: short-cut mode, write automatically after adjustment
5
6
Condition01: Displayed only when the Address 99-6 is set to 2 or 3 to use as Constant Feed Weigher.
Condition02: Displayed only when the Address 04-2 is set to other than 0 (external adjustment).

05 Auxiliary Device Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Zero Position of Check Select the logic of the zero position of the check weight. 0 0-1
Weight 0: negative logic 1: positive logic
2 Check Weight Move Select the move of the check weight. 0: level 1: pulse 2: external pulse 0 0-2
3 Feed Rate Display Switch the display between the feed rate and the feed rate varying per the update time. 0 0-1
Condition03
0: feed rate 1: feed rate varying per the update time (set to address 01-6)
4 Span Adjustment at Set the difference to compensate the actual weight and the test chain adjustment. 0 0 - 99999
Actual Weight 0: do not adjust
else: e.g. the feed rate will be multiplied by 0.5000 when 0.5000 is set.
06 Speed
1 Upper Limit Alarm (u) Set the threshold value of the upper limit alarm of the speed. 900 0 - 1999
2 Lower Limit Alarm (u) Set the threshold value of the lower limit alarm of the speed. 100 0 - 1999
3 Timer (u) Set the time allowing the speed to be out of the range of the upper and lower limits. The time set 5.0 0 - 999
4 Rated Frequency Set the rated input frequency in Hz. The value set here will be the reference value of 100% of the 250 0 - 499
speed input level indicator.
5 Speed Input Mode Select the speed input to use. 0 0-2
0: speed signal 1: internal pulse (100Hz) 2: pulse proportional to the current control output
(100Hz at 100%) 3: use the load input pulse
6 Weight of Load Input Set the weight of one pulse of the load input pulses when "3" is set at the address 06-5. The unit is 1000 0 - 999999
Pulse 100 times the unit of the internal weight. Only the internal control function is available when this
Condition04
function is used.
Be sure to set 0 (do not perform self diagnosis) to the address 96-1 before using this function.
07 Reference Adjustment Value
1 Target Pulse Set the number of pulses corresponding to the integral number of rotations of the belt. 15000 1 - 9999999
2 Span Reference Value Set the reference value of the span adjustment in the unit of 1000 times the internal weight unit. 20000 1 - 99999999
3 S-Operation Adjustment Set the totalized value at the time of completion of the adjustment at S-operation in the unit of 1000 20000 1 - 99999999
Value times the internal weight unit.
08 Reference Adjustment Value
1 Initial Set the initial adjustment value. It is approximately input voltage mV   13333 0 -999999 - 999999
2 Span Coefficient1 Set the span adjustment value with test chain. 500000 1 - 9999999
3 Span Coefficient2 Set the span adjustment value with test chain. 4 -5 - 7
09 Adjustment Reference1
1 Integral Number of Set the integral number of rotations. 2 1 - 9999
Rotations
2 Belt Length Set the entire length of the belt in meter unit. 10000 1 - 999999
3 Weight per Unit Length Set the weight per unit length of the test chain at 100 times the internal weight unit. 10000 1 - 999999
4 Adjustment Time Leave this parameter in the default setting. This address is for future extension. 0 0 - 999
5 Zero Adjustment Range Set the range to automatically compensate the zero adjustment in the proportion (%) to the load 30 1 - 999
rate.
6 Span Adjustment Range Leave this parameter in the default setting. This address is for future extension. 0 0 - 999
Condition03: Displayed only when the Address 01-6 is set to other than 0 as the average update time of the feed rate.
Condition04: Displayed only when the Address 99-6 is set to 2 or 3 to use as Constant Feed Weigher, and the Address 06-5 is set to 3 to use as totalized pulse input.

10 Operation Setting1 Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Operation Stop Timer Set the time (in second) from the input of the Stop signal until the weighing operation completely 5.0 0 - 9999
(u) stops.
2 Alarm Start Timer (u) Set the time (in second) from the start up of the system until the output of the alarm signal. 5.0 0 - 9999
3 Power Conservation Set the time to display the screen saver. The screen saver will start when there is no key operation 0 0 - 300
Mode during the time (minute) set here.
11 Moisture Setting
1 Moisture Setting Method Select the moisture setting method. NOTE 1) 0 0-3
0: do not use 1: by key switch 2: by selection signal 3: externally
2 Moisture Mode of Feed Set the method to perform the moisture compensation to the feed rate setting. 0 0-1
Rate Setting D
0: wet based W  ( from D  W  (1  M ))
1 M
1: dry based W  D  (1  M )
For example, when the feed rate setting is 100t/h and the moisture setting is 10%, the setting will
differ depending on the difference of the calculation method as below: Condition05
D 100
Wet based value : W    111 t / h
1  M 1  0.1
Dry based value : W  D  (1  0.1)  100  1.1  110 t / h
3 Moisture Mode of Select the moisture mode from: 0 0-1

Totalized Value 0: wet weight (weighing value without compensation)
1: dry weight (weighing value after moisture compensation) Condition06
4 Maximum Moisture Set the percentage of the reference value when the moisture is set externally using 4 to 20mA, etc. 100 0 - 999
Percentage The default is 100% when 20mA is input.
5
6
Condition05: Displayed only when the Address 99-6 is set to 2 or 3 to use as Constant Feed Weigher, and the Address 11-1 is set to other than 0 (use moisture setting).
Condition06: Displayed only when the Address 11-1 is set to other than 0 (use moisture setting).

12 Ratio Setting Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Ratio Setting Mode Set the setting mode of the ratio. 0 0-2
0: do not use ratio control 1: set the ratio by key operation Condition01
2: set the ratio by external signal
2 Maximum Ratio Set the reference value in percentage when the ratio is input by 4 to 20mA, etc. The position of the Condition07 100 0 - 999
decimal point of the ratio is as below. To set the ratio with analog pulse input, set the reference
value when the input is 100%. E.g. to set 50.00% at 20mA analog input, set 50 to this address.
Otherwise : 0.0
14 Control Method
1 Control Method Switch the control method between the following. 0 0-1
0: instantaneous value (normally, use this setting)
1: integral value
2 Kp Constant Set the control constant Kp (proportional gain). Condition01 0.30 0.00 - 999.99
3 Ti Constant Set the control constant Ti (integral time). 1.50 0.00 - 99999
4 α Constant Set the control constant α (feed forward compensation). 0 -99.99 - 99999
5 Initial Control Output Set 0 to use the system. 0 0.0 - 200.0
15 Independent and Feed Rate Setting
1 Lower Alarm Limit of Set the lower limit of the feed rate setting. The alarm will be output when the feed rate setting is 120 0 - 99999
Feed Rate Setting (u) below this value.
2 Alarm Timer of Feed Set the time (in second) to continue to output or the time (in second) to reset the alarm of the feed 5.0 0 - 999
Rate Setting (u) rate setting.
3 Scale Interval of Feed Set the scale interval of the feed rate setting. 0 0-7
Rate Setting (u) 0: 1 1: 2 2: 5 3: 10 4: 20 5: 50 6: 100 7: 200
4 Hold Feed Rate Setting Select whether or not to hold and set the setting values of the external operation to the internal 0 0-1
operation when the operation is switched from external to internal.
0: do not hold and set 1: hold and set Condition01
5 Reference Value of Set the reference value to use to set from external input (normally the value is the maximum 120.0 0 - 999999
Feed Rate Setting capacity).
(Independent setting) To set the independent setting from analog input, set the reference value when the input is 100%.
E.g. set 120.0 to set 120.0t/h at 20mA analog input. 6 digits maximum can be input.
6 Setting Method of Feed Set the method of the feed rate setting. 0 0-1
Rate Setting 0: by key operation at anytime
(Independent setting) 1: by external signal:
The external setting is available during remote operation. The setting made by the front
touch panel is available during the local operation.
Condition07: Displayed only when the Address 99-6 is set to 2 or 3 to use as Constant Feed Weigher, and the Address 12-1 is set to other than 0 (use ratio setting).

16 Sequence Control Weighing Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Preset Counter (u) Set the weighing value to calculate with the preset counter. Set this value so that it is 1000 times 0 0 - 999999999
the internal weighing unit.
2
3
17 Deviation
1 Reference Deviation (u) Set the scale interval of the deviation counter. The unit is the feed rate setting. 1.0 0 - 99999
2 Upper and Lower Limit 1 Set the limit of the absolute value of the deviation amount. The upper and lower limit 1 of the 12.0 0 - 99999
(u) deviation will be ON if the absolute value of the deviation amount exceeds the value set to this
address.
3 Alarm Timer 1 (u) Set the delay timer of Upper and Lower Limit 1 in second. 5.0 0.0 - 99.9
4 Upper and Lower Limit 2 Set the limit of the absolute value of the deviation amount. The upper and lower limit 2 of the Condition01 24.0 0 - 99999
(u) deviation will be ON if the absolute value of the deviation amount exceeds the value set to this
address.
5 Alarm Timer 2 (u) Set the delay timer of Upper and Lower Limit 2 in second. 5.0 0.0 - 99.9
6 Deviation Average Set the average time of deviation in second. The deviation alarm will detect with the value after 0.0 0.0 - 100.0
having performed the deviation average.
18 Control Output Limiter
1 Upper Limit of Control Set the upper limit of the control output in percentage. The limiter is disabled when 0 is set. 0 0 - 100
Output Limiter
Condition01
2 Lower Limit of Control Set the lower limit of the control output in percentage. The limiter is disabled when 0 is set. 0 0 - 100
Output Limiter
3
4
5
6
19 Volumetric
1 Volumetric Enabled Set whether or not to use volumetric control. 0 0-2
0: do not use volumetric 1: use only weight volumetric Condition01
2: use speed and weight volumetric
2 Changeover Input Mode Set the mode to switch to volumetric with external volumetric switch signal. 0 0-1
0: status 1: startup
3 Maintain Mode Set the operation when the volumetric has been reset. 0 0-1
0: do not hold 1: hold
4 Average Time Set the average time of the bulk density at normal operation. 5 0-8
0: 1min 1: 2min 2: 4min 3: 8min 4: 16min Condition08
5: 32 min 6: 64min 7: 128min 8:256min
5 Bulk Density Reference Set the bulk density when the load rate meter is 100%. This is a coefficient to obtain the bulk 80 0 - 999
density and not the load rate.
6 Speed Error Detection Set the time (second) to detect the speed error. 1.0 0.0 - 100
Time
Condition08: Displayed only when the Address 19-1 is set to other than 0 (use volumetric).

Angle Meter
20 Angle Meter Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Reference Angle1 Set the minimum angle of the angle input in degrees. 0 -9999 - 9999
2 Reference Angle Input1 Set the number of counts of analog input of angles at the angle set to Reference Angle1. 0 -9999 - 99999
3 Reference Angle2 Set the minimum angle of the angle input in degrees. 9000 -9999 - 9999
4 Reference Angle Input2 Set the number of counts of analog input of angles at the angle set to Reference Angle2. 10000 -9999 - 99999
Condition09
5 Adjustment Angle Set the number of angles to adjust with zero and span adjustments. 2 0 - 10
Samples
6 Adjustment Selection Select the mode of zero and span adjustments. 0 0-1
0: coarse adjustment 1: fine adjustment
21 Angle Sample
1 Angle Sample1 Set the angle to perform zero or span adjustment. (unit: 0.01 degree) 0 -9999 - 9999
2 Angle Sample2 The number of Angle Samples set to the address 20-5 is available counted from Angle Sample1. 1000 -9999 - 9999
3 Angle Sample3 Set in order from the smaller angles. 2000 -9999 - 9999
Condition10
4 Angle Sample4 3000 -9999 - 9999
5 Angle Sample5 4000 -9999 - 9999
6 Angle Sample6 5000 -9999 - 9999
22 Angle Sample
1 Angle Sample7 Set the angle to perform zero or span adjustment. (unit: 0.01 degree) 6000 -9999 - 9999
2 Angle Sample8 The number of Angle Samples set to the address 20-5 is available counted from Angle Sample1. 7000 -9999 - 9999
Set in order from the smaller angles. Condition10
3 Angle Sample9 8000 -9999 - 9999
4 Angle Sample10 9000 -9999 - 9999
5 Adjustment Range Set the range of difference of the angles to perform zero or span adjustment. (unit: 0.1 degree) 50 0 - 999
Condition09
6 Reference Sample Number Set the number of the Angle Sample which is the reference angle (to perform coarse adjustment) 1 0 - 10
23 Zero Adjustment Sample
1 Zero Adjustment Sample1 Set the compensation amount to perform the zero adjustment per Angle Sample. It is written when 0 -99999 - 999999
2 Zero Adjustment Sample2 the fine adjustment of the zero adjustment is performed. 0 -99999 - 999999
3 Zero Adjustment Sample3 0 -99999 - 999999
Condition10
24 Zero Adjustment Sample
1 Zero Adjustment Sample7 Set the compensation amount to perform the zero adjustment per Angle Sample. It is written when 0 -99999 - 999999
2 Zero Adjustment Sample8 the fine adjustment of the zero adjustment is performed. 0 -99999 - 999999
3 Zero Adjustment Sample9 Condition10 0 -99999 - 999999
4 Zero Adjustment 0 -99999 - 999999
Sample10
5
6
Condition09: Displayed only when the Address 99-6 is set to 1 (use as Reclaimer).
Condition10: Displayed only when the Address 99-6 is set to 1 (use as Reclaimer). The number of Angle Samples set to Address 20-5 are displayed from Angle Sample1.

24 Span Adjustment Sample Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Span Adjustment Set the compensation amount to perform the zero adjustment per Angle Sample. It is written when 100000 0 - 999999
Sample1 the fine adjustment of the zero adjustment is performed.
2 Span Adjustment 100000 0 - 999999
Sample2
Sample3
Condition10
Sample4
Sample5
Sample6
25 Span Adjustment Sample
1 Span Adjustment Set the compensation amount to perform the zero adjustment per Angle Sample. It is written when 100000 0 - 999999
Sample7 the fine adjustment of the zero adjustment is performed.
Sample8
Condition10
Sample9
Sample10
5
6

2-stage Changeover and Low Speed

27 Reference Adjustment Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Target Pulse Set the number of pulses corresponding to the integrated number of rotations of the belt. 15000 0 - 999999
2 Span Reference Value Set the reference value of the span adjustment with the unit of 1000 times the internal weight unit. 20000 0 - 99999999
Condition11
3 S-operation Adjustment Set the totalizer value at the time of completion of adjustment at S-operation with the unit of 1000 20000 0 - 99999999
Value times the internal weight unit.
4
5
6
28 Reference Adjustment
1 Initial Set the initial load of the initial adjustment. 13333 -999999 - 999999
2 Span Coefficient1 Set the adjustment value of the span with test chain. Condition11 500000 0 - 9999999
3 Span Coefficient2 Set the adjustment value of the span with test chain. 4 -5 - 7
4
5
6
29 Adjustment Reference1
1 Integrated Number of Set the integral number of rotations of the belt. 2 0 - 9999
Rotations
2 Belt Length Set the entire length (mm) of the belt. 10000 0 - 999999
3 Weight per Unit Length Set the weight per unit length of the test chain with the unit of 100 times the internal weight unit. 10000 0 - 999999
4 Adjustment Time Leave this parameter to the default setting. This address is for future extension. Condition11 0 0 - 999
5 Span Adjustment at Set the difference to compensate the actual weight and the test chain adjustment at low speed 0 0 - 99999
Actual Weight operation.
0: do not adjust
else: e.g. the feed rate will be multiplied by 0.5000 when 0.5000 is set.
6
Condition11: Displayed only when the Address 99-6 is set to 3 (use as 2-stage CFW).

Control Input/Output
30 Control Input/Output Logic Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Control Input logic Switch the control input logic in bit and octal numbers. 0: Negative logic, 1: Positive logic 0 0 - 377
Condition12
(IN1 to 8) Note2)
2 Control Output logic Switch the control output logic in bit and octal numbers. 0: Negative logic, 1: Positive logic 0 0 - 177777
Condition13
(OUT1 to 16) Note2)
3 Control input output Set the mode of special setting to apply to the control input output. 0 0-3
special setting 0: default setting for input and output 1: special setting for input
2: special setting for output 3: special setting for both input and output
31 Control Input Port Allocation 1
1 IN1 allocation Set the allocation of the input signals to set the default allocation. To set the other input data, other 0 0 - 9999
2 IN2 allocation than the default allocation, use the data numbers. 0 0 - 9999
3 IN3 allocation 0: Default allocation (listed below). 0 0 - 9999
IN1: Operation stop IN4: Check weight zero position Condition12
4 IN4 allocation 0 0 - 9999
IN2: External selection IN5: Deviation reset
IN3: Totalizer value reset IN6: Setting value hold
32 Control Input Port Allocation 2
1 IN7 allocation Set the allocation of the input signals to set the default allocation. To set the other input data, other 0 0 - 9999
2 IN8 allocation than the default allocation, use the data numbers. 0 0 - 9999
0: Default allocation (listed below). Condition12
3
4 IN7: Automatic operation command IN8: Control output hold
33 Control Output Port Allocation 1
1 OUT1 allocation Set the allocation of the output signals to set the default allocation. To set the other output data, 0 0 - 9999
2 OUT2 allocation other than the default allocation, use the data numbers. 0 0 - 9999
3 OUT3 allocation 0: Default allocation (listed below). 0 0 - 9999
OUT 1: System ready OUT 4: Calibrating Condition13
4 OUT4 allocation 0 0 - 9999
OUT 2: Weighing OUT 5: Adjustment operation
OUT 3: W-operation OUT 6: Automatic operation
34 Control Output Port Allocation 2
1 OUT7 allocation Set the allocation of the output signals to set the default allocation. To set the other output data, 0 0 - 9999
2 OUT8 allocation other than the default allocation, use the data numbers. 0 0 - 9999
3 OUT9 allocation 0: Default allocation (listed below). 0 0 - 9999
OUT 7: Compensation completion OUT 10: Deviation upper/lower limit2 Condition13
OUT 8: External selection OUT 11: Setting value upper/lower limit
OUT 9: Deviation upper/lower limit1 OUT 12: Low speed operation
Condition12: Displayed only when the Address 30-3 is set to 1 or 3.
Condition13: Displayed only when the Address 30-3 is set to 2 or 3.

Note2:
Set the control input and output logics in octal numbers.
To set the input logics IN1, IN3, IN6, IN7 in positive logic, follow the IN8 -> 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 <- IN1
below procedure:
1
a. The negative logic is 0, and the positive logic is 1. Line 0 or 1
from IN1 from right to left. (The below sample is from IN1 to IN8 2
from right to left. 1 as IN1, IN3, IN6, IN7, and 0 as IN2, IN4, IN5,
IN8) 4
IN8 ->01100101<- IN1
10
b. Each digit of the numbers above has a corresponding value that 20
is from the right to the left: 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 40, 100, and 200. Sum
the value of all the numbers which are 1. (refer to the example on 40
the right)
100
200
Total 145

36 Control Method Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Kp Constant Set the control constant Kp (the proportional gain). 30 0 - 99999
2 Ti Constant Set the control constant Ti (the integral time). 150 0 - 99999
3 α Constant Set the control constant α (the feedforward compensation). Condition11 0 -99999 - 99999
4 Maximum Ratio at Low Set the maximum ratio during the low stage operation in percentage. 100 0 - 999
Stage Operation
5
6
37 Feed Rate
1 Display Unit (u) Set the unit to display the feed rate. 5 0-5
0: g/min 1: kg/min 2: t/min 3: g/h 4: kg/h 5: t/h
2 Displayed Decimal Point Set the position of the decimal point to display the feed rate. 1 0-3
Position (u) 0: 0000. 1: 000.0 2: 00.00 3: 0.000
3 Display Scale Interval Set the minimum scale interval to display the feed rate. 2 0-7
(u) 0: 1 1:2 2: 5 3: 10 4: 20 5: 50 6: 100 7: 200 Condition11
4 Maximum Capacity Set the maximum capacity. 1200 0 - 99999
5 Setting Reference Set the reference value when the setting is input externally. Usually, the reference value is equal to 1200 0 - 99999
the maximum capacity.
6 Setting Value Lower Set the lower limit of the setting of the feed rate. An alarm will be output when the feed rate setting 0 0 - 99999
Limit (u) is below this value.
38 Alarm
1 Feed Rate Upper Limit Set the upper limit of the feed rate in proportion to the maximum capacity. An alarm will be output 1200 0 - 99999
(u) when the feed rate exceeds this value. Set "0" to not make the comparison.
2 Feed Rate Lower Limit Set the lower limit of the feed rate in proportion to the maximum capacity. An alarm will be output Condition11 120 0 - 99999
(u) when the feed rate is below this value. Set "0" to not make the comparison.
3 Alarm Timer (u) Set the delay timer of the feed rate alarm in second. 5.0 0 - 999
4
5
6
39 Reference of Speed and Load
1 Speed Meter Upper Set the upper limit of the speed in proportion to the rated frequency of the speed input. An alarm 900 0 - 1999
Limit % (u) will be output when the speed input exceeds this value. Set "0" to not make the comparison.
2 Speed Meter Lower Set the lower limit of the speed in proportion to the rated frequency of the speed input. An alarm 100 0 - 1999
Limit % (u) will be output when the speed input is below this value. Set "0" to not make the comparison. Condition11
3 Alarm Timer (u) Set the timing to output and reset the alarm. 5.0 0 - 999
4 Rated Frequency Set the rated input frequency in Hz. This is the reference value when the speed input is 100%. 250 0 - 499
5
6

Serial Input/Output
40 Serial Port 1 Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Baud Rate Set the baud rate (BPS) of Serial port1. Note3) 1 0-3
Condition14
2 Bit Size Set the bit size of Serial port1. Note4) 6 0-7
3 Interface Set the interface of Serial port1. Note5) 0 0-5
4
5
6
41 Serial Port 2
Condition15
4
5
6
42 Serial Port 3
Condition16
4
5
6
Note3) 0: 1200 BPS Note4) 0: 7 bits + Even parity+ 2 stop bits Note5) 0: Not used
1: 2400 BPS 1: 7 bits + Odd parity+ 2 stop bits 1: Yamato standard communication
2: 4800 BPS 2: 7 bits + Even parity+ 2 stop bits 2: Communication with the sequencer
3: 9600 BPS 3: 7 bits + Odd parity+ 1 stop bit 3: Communication with the printer
4: 8 bits + No parity+ 2 stop bits 4: Compatible to conventional version1
5: 8 bits + No parity+ 1 stop bit 5: Compatible to conventional version2
6: 8 bits + Even parity+ 1 stop bit
7: 8 bits + Odd parity+ 1 stop bit
Condition14: Displayed only when the Address 40-3 is set to other than 0.

45 Compatible to Conventional Version1 Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Protocol Setting Set the protocol. 1 0-5
0: unconditional communication of the specified data
1: CFC-100 compatible format
2 Format Detail1 When the address 45-1 is 0: set the data number to send. 0 0 - 99999
When the address 45-1 is 1: select the data format to send from below.
0: sent data specified format (specify the data to communicate)
1: maximum communication of data (all the data are sent depending on the type of the device)
2: minimum communication of data (only the totalized value, the feed rate, the load rate are sent) Condition17
3 Format Detail2 When the address 45-1 is 0: select the status of zero of the data to send. 0 0 - 99999
0: supply zero (00012) 1: suppress zero ( 12)
2: 0.0 format ( 01) 3: 0.00 format ( 001)
When the address 45-1 is 1: select the CR code from below.
0: without CR 1: with CR
4 Format Detail3 When the address 45-1 is 0: select whether there are stations or not, or set the station ID number. 0 0 - 99999
0: without station 1 to 9: set the station ID number
5
6
46 Compatible to Conventional Version2
1 Protocol Setting Refer to the address 45. 1 0-5
2 Format Detail1 0 0 - 99999
Condition18
5
6
47 YAMATO Standard Communication
1 ID number Set the station ID number when the YAMATO standard communication is used to connect a 0 0 - 99
Condition19
computer. Set 0 when there is no station ID numbers.
2
3
4
5
6
Condition17: Displayed only when either of the addresses 40-3, 41-3 or 42-3 is set to 4.

Linearization
48 Linearization1 Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Linearization Permission Select whether or not to enable the linearization. 0 0-1
0: disabled 1: enabled
2 Linearization of 0% Set the linearization at each percentage. Set the parameter in the unit of 0.1 %, by multiplying the 0 -999 - 999
3 Linearization of 10% difference rate of the load rate by -1. 0 -999 - 999
4 Linearization of 20% Be sure to set 0.0 to the addresses 48-2 (linearization of 0%) because the linearization of 0% is the Condition20 0 -999 - 999
reference value of the linearization after the zero and span adjustments.
5 Linearization of 30% 0 -999 - 999
6 Linearization of 40% 0 -999 - 999
49 Linearization2
1 Linearization of 50% Set the linearization at each percentage. Set the parameter in the unit of 0.1 %, by multiplying the -999 - 999
2 Linearization of 60% difference rate of the load rate by -1. -999 - 999
3 Linearization of 70% Be sure to set 0.0 to the addresses 49-6 (linearization of 100%) because the linearization of 100% -999 - 999
is the reference value of the linearization after the zero and span adjustments. Condition20
4 Linearization of 80% -999 - 999
Condition20: Displayed only when the Address 48-1 is set to 1.
Printer
50 Printer (General) Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Return Codes Select the return codes. 0 0-1
0: CR 1: CR+LF
2 Setting Print Select whether or not to print the guidance of the setting contents during the printing of the 1 0-1
settings.
0: without guidance 1: with guidance
3 Waiting Time after Print Set the waiting time after the transmission of the CR code until the transmission of the next data. Condition21 0.1 0 - 99
Set the time in 0.1 second unit.
Set 2.1 seconds to connect MP-160.
4 Clear Sub-total and Select whether or not to clear the sub-total and the number of counts of the sub-total after the 0 0-1
Count completion of the sub-total printing.
0: do not clear 1: clear
5
6
Condition21: Displayed only when either the Address 40-3, 41-3 or 42-3 is set to 3.

Special Function
52 OR Output1 Allocation Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 OR Output1 Original Signal1 Set the data number of the OR signal of the output signal. The signal set here will be output at OR 0 0 - 9999
2 OR Output1 Original Signal2 Output1 (data number 9050). 0 0 - 9999
3 OR Output1 Original Signal3 Set 0 to the address of the signals to not output. 0 0 - 9999
4 OR Output1 Original Signal4 Condition22 0 0 - 9999
5 OR Output1 Original Signal5 0 0 - 9999
53 OR Output2 Allocation
54 OR Output3 Allocation
55 SAI Function
1 Number of Check (u) Set the number of times checked with SAI function. 10 0 - 20
2 Check Time (u) Set the time needed to check with SAI function in the unit of second. 60 0 - 999
57 SBS Function
1 Reference Length (u) Set the reference length in meter to measure the length. 1000 0 - 999999
2
58 Converter Settings (Usually leave the parameters at default state. These parameters are only used for the converter)
1 Load Rate Display (u) Select whether or not to enable the display of the negative values of the load rate. 0 0-1
0: enabled 1: disabled
2 Load Cell Output Value Set the output voltage (mV) of the load cell when the load is 100%. This is used to adjust load 1 0-1
(u) cells.
Condition25
3 Load Rate Upper Limit Select whether or not to use the upper limiter, or set the upper limiter (%) of the load rate output. 2.1
Limiter (u) 0: do not use else: % of the upper limiter of the load cell output
4 Load Rate Lower Limit Select whether or not to use the lower limiter, or set the lower limiter (%) of the load rate output. 0 0-1
Limiter (u) 0: do not use else: % of the lower limiter of the load cell output
Condition25: Displayed only when the Address 99-6 is set to 4.

Sequencer
60 General Setting for Sequencer Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Sequencer Select the sequencer. 0: Mitsubishi 1: Omron 0 0-1
2 Bus Configuration Select whether or not to use the bus configuration. To use the bus configuration set the device 0 0 - 9999
number.
0: no bus configuration (1 to 1 communication)
1 or other: n to 1 bus configuration Note6) Condition26
3 ID number Set the ID number to the sequencer for communication with the bus configuration 00 0 - 31
4 PC number NOT USED. 00 0 - 99
5 CFC ID number Set the ID number of CFC for bus configuration. Note7) 0 0 - 99
0: no bus configuration else: ID number of CFC
6
61 Sequencer Device Number
1 Receiving bit device Set the starting address of the bit device to read from the Sequencer 2000 0 - 9999
2 Request receiving word Set the starting address of word device to read by the serial setting command request of the 810 0 - 9999
device Sequencer
3 Every transmission word Set the starting address of the word device to write to the Sequencer at every cycle 800 0 - 9999
device
4 Every transmission bit Set the starting address of the bit device to write to the Sequencer at every cycle Condition26 2010 0 - 9999
device
5 Requested transmission Set the starting address of the word device to write when the serial weighing result is requested 820 0 - 9999
word device from the Sequencer.
6 Receiving error bit Set the address of bit device to alert the problem when an error is found in the request from the 2008 0 - 9999
device sequencer
Note6: When n to 1 bus configuration is applied, set the number of the bit device (communication device) which indicates that one time communication has finished. When the communication finishes, the
bit device comes to ON, when on-demand command should be sent.
Note7: On-demand command will be sent with the value set here from the sequencer. It is necessary to set different value for each CFC connected via the bus configuration.
Condition26: Displayed only when either of the Addresses 40-3, 41-3 or 42-3 is set to 2.

62 Receiving Bit Device Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Receiving bit device1 Set the data number of the control input to receive from the Sequencer. (the bit device received 0 0 - 9999
2 Receiving bit device2 periodically from the sequencer such as the serial reading command) 0 0 - 9999
3 Receiving bit device3 The end code must be 0. 0 0 - 9999
Condition26
4 Receiving bit device4 0 0 - 9999
63 Request receiving word device1
1 Request receiving word device1 Set the data number to receive from the Sequencer. (the word device read from the sequencer 0 0 - 9999
2 Request receiving word device2 when there is a request from the sequencer) 0 0 - 9999
3 Request receiving word device3 The end code must be 0 0 0 - 9999
Condition26
4 Request receiving word device4 0 0 - 9999
64 Request receiving word device2
1 Request receiving word device7 Set the data number to receive from the Sequencer. (the word device read from the sequencer 0 0 - 9999
2 Request receiving word device8 when there is a request from the sequencer) 0 0 - 9999
3 Request receiving word device9 The end code must be 0 0 0 - 9999
Condition26
4
5
6
65 Request Transmission Word Device1
1 Request transmission Set the data number to send to the Sequencer. (the word device to send to the sequencer when 361 0 - 9999
word device1 there is a request from the sequencer)
2 Request transmission The end code must be 0 1795 0 - 9999
word device2
3 Request transmission 386 0 - 9999
word device3
Condition26
word device4
word device5
word device6

66 Request Transmission Word Device2 Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Request transmission Set the data number to send to the Sequencer. (the word device to send to the sequencer when 0 0 - 9999
word device7 there is a request from the sequencer)
2 Request transmission The end code must be 0 0 0 - 9999
word device8
word device9
Condition26
word device10
word device11
word device12
67 Every transmission word device
1 Request transmission Set the data number of the word device to send every time to the Sequencer. 1795 0 - 9999
word device1 The end code must be 0
word device2
word device3
Condition26
word device4
word device5
word device6
68 Every transmission bit device
1 Request transmission bit Set the data number of the bit device to send every time to the Sequencer. 0 0 - 9999
device1 The end code must be 0
2 Request transmission bit 0 0 - 9999
device2
device3
Condition26
device4
device5
device6
Note: Specify the bit device number (the communication module number) specifying that the communication has terminated when the communication is n:1. The bit device specified here will become ON when
the communication has terminated. Switch the bus configuration owning command at this timing.
Note: The on-demand commands from the sequencer will be issued with the value set here. The value of all the CFCs connected with bus configuration set here must all differ.

Input/Output of the Operator

70 Analog Setting Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Initial Set the parameter to set the initial value of the analog setting input. When it is set to "0", the initial 0 -3000 - 3000
value becomes 0 at 4mA input. -6.25μA will be compensated per 1 count.
2 Span Set the parameter to set the span of the analog setting input. When it is set to 1.0000, it will be the Condition27 1.0000 0 - 99999
span reference at 16mA input. When it is set to 2.0000, it will be the span reference at 8mA input.
3 Average Time Set the average time of the analog input in second. 0.0 0 - 1000
4 Analog Setting Data Set the data number of the data of the analog setting. 1727 0 - 99999
0: do not use 1727: independent
1729: ratio 367: moisture 2610: angle
5 Input Reference Value Set the reference value of the analog setting data. Usually, this setting has to be 10000 and do not 10000 0 - 99999
Condition27
Data modify it.
71 Pulse String
1 Pulse Input Data Set the data number of the pulse string setting. Set "1" to the address 71-5 before setting the data 0 0 - 9999
number to use the pulse string as control input terminal. Note1)
0: do not use 1727: independent setting
1729: ratio setting 367: moisture setting
1750: independent setting (pulse weight)
2 Number of Reference Set 100% frequency to set independent, ratio and moisture settings. Set the number of reference 100 0 - 9999
Pulses pulses to perform the independent setting with the pulse weight (1750).
3 Reference Output Value Set 10000 to set independent, ratio and moisture settings. Set the weight when the number of 10000 0 - 99999
pulses set at reference value 1 has been input (in the unit of 100 times the unit of the internal
weight value) to perform the independent setting with the pulse weight (1750). Condition28
4 Average Time Set the average time of the pulse string input in second. 0 0 - 1000
5 Status Mode Select how to use the input terminal of the pulse string. Be sure to set "0" to the address 71-1 0 0-1
before setting this address.
0: use as pulse string 1: use as control input
73 Analog Output1
1 Analog Output Mode Set the mode of the analog output. 1 0-2
0: do not use 1: 4-20mA 2: 0-10V
2 Output Data Set the data number of the output data. Usually, select from below. 1799 0 - 9999
Condition29
3 Output Reference Set the reference value of the data to be output. Usually set to 10000. This value will be the value 1000 0 - 99999
subtracted by the offset when the addresses 73-4 and 75-4 are set.
4 Offset Set the offset value of the analog output. 4mA will be output at 50% when 5000 is set. 0 -99999 - 99999
5
6
Note: Be sure to set 0 as the data number of the devices that are not used. Although the settings of independent, ratio, moisture, angle, etc are available from whether of analog setting, pulse string setting,
serial communication, or CC-Link, it is necessary to set from only one device.

74 Analog Output1 Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value

1 Average Time (u) Set the average time of the analog input in second. 0.0 0 - 1000
2 Initial Set the initial value of the analog output. 6.25μA will be compensated per 1 count. 0 0 - 1000
Condition29
3 Span Set the span value of the analog output. 1.0000 0 - 19999
4 Output Test Set the reference value to perform the output test. 12.000 0 - 20000
75 Analog Output2
0: do not use 1: 4-20mA
2 Output Data Set the data number of the output data. Usually, select from below. 384 0 - 9999
Condition30
3 Output Reference Set the reference value of the data to be output. Usually set to 10000. This value will be the value 0.0 0 - 99999
subtracted by the offset when the addresses 73-4 and 75-4 are set.
4 Offset Set the offset value of the analog output. 4mA will be output at 50% when 5000 is set. 1727 -99999 - 99999
76 Analog Output2
1 Average Time (u) Set the average time of the analog input in second. 0.0 0 - 1000
2 Initial Set the initial value of the analog output. 6.25μA will be compensated per 1 count. 0 -999 - 1000
Condition30
3 Span Set the span value of the analog output. 1.0000 0 - 19999
4 Output Test Set the reference value to perform the output test. 12.000 0 - 20000
77 Fast Pulse
1 Pulse Type Set how to output the fast pulse. 0 0-1
0: fast pulse (positive and negative) 1: F/I pulse
2 Pulse Weight Set the weight of 1 fast pulse in the unit of 100 times the unit of the internal weight. Set the value 1000 0 - 999999
referring to the decimal point of the address setting because the decimal point will be set
automatically at the position of 100 times the unit of the internal weight.
3 Pulse Width Set the width of pulse in the unit of second. 0.100 0 - 9999
4 Moisture Mode Set the moisture mode. 0: wet 1: dry Condition07 0 0 -1
78 Slow Pulse
1 Pulse Weight Set the weight of 1 slow pulse in the unit of 1000 times the unit of the internal weight. Set the value 100.0 1 - 999999
referring to the decimal point of the address setting because the decimal point will be set
automatically at the position of 1000 times the unit of the internal weight.
2 Pulse Width Set the width of pulse in the unit of second. 1.000 0 - 9999
3 Moisture Mode Set the moisture mode. 0: wet 1: dry Condition07 0 0-1
79 Relay Output1, 2
1 Relay Output Logic Set the relay output logic in octal numbers. 0: negative logic 1: positive logic Note2) 0 0 - 37
2 Relay Output1 Signal Selection Set the relay output signal. 0 0 - 9999
3 Relay Output2 Signal Selection 0: default setting as listed below else: data number of the output signal 0 0 - 9999
4 Relay Output3 Signal Selection RY1: lower check weight RY2: feed rate upper and lower limit 0 0 - 9999
5 Relay Output4 Signal Selection RY3: speed upper and lower limit RY4: load rate upper and lower limit 0 0 - 9999
6

Address Setting for the Optional Slot
D/A Board (EV567F)

80 Analog Output (Set the parameters to the addresses 80s to use optional slot) Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
0: do not use 1: 4 to 20mA 2: 0 to 10V
2 Output Data Set the data number of the output data. Usually select from below: 364 0 - 9999
0: do not use 384: feed rate 364 load rate
1799: control output 382: feed rate of 2-stage CFW
3 Output Reference Set the reference value of the output data. Usually set 10000. Condition31 10000 0 - 99999
When the offset of the address 73-4 is set: the value to set here will be the value after subtraction
of the offset of the address 73-4.
4 Offset Set the offset value of the analog output. E.g. 4mA will be output at 50% when 5000 is set. 0 -99999 - 99999
5
6
81 Analog Output
1 Average Time (u) Select the average number of times of analog output of data. 0 0-8
0: 200ms 1: 400ms 2: 800ms 3: 1.6s 4: 3.2s 5: 6.4s 6: 12.8s 7: 25.6s
2 Initial Set the initial value of the analog output. Condition31 0 -300 - 300
3 Span Set the span value of the analog output 10000 0 - 19999
4 Output Test Set the reference value to perform test output. 12000 0 - 20000
5
6
82 Relay Output1
1 Relay Output Logic Set the relay output logic in octal numbers. 0: negative logic 1: positive logic Note2) 0 0 - 77
2
3
4
5
6
83 Relay Output2
1 Relay Output1 Signal Selection Set the relay output signal. 0 0 - 9999
2 Relay Output2 Signal Selection 0: default setting as listed below else: data number of the output signal 0 0 - 9999
3 Relay Output3 Signal Selection RY1: weighing RY4: preset counter output 0 0 - 9999
4 Relay Output4 Signal Selection RY2: automatic operation RY5: deviation alarm1 0 0 - 9999
5 Relay Output5 Signal Selection RY3: external selection RY6: deviation alarm2 0 0 - 9999
6 Relay Output6 Signal Selection 0 0 - 9999
Condition31: Displayed only when the Address 80-1 (analog output mode) is set to other than 0.

Address Setting for the Optional Slot
Cc-Link Interface
80 General setting Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Operation setting Set the operation mode of CC-Link. 1 0-2
0: do not use CC-Link 1: use CC-Link (default mode) 2: special mode
2 Receiving (long) Area Set "0". This is the 4-area of the receiving long word device. 0 0-4
definition 0: do not receive every time 1:I1 2:I1,I2 3:I1,I2,I7 4:I1,I2,I7,I8
3 Receiving (word) Area Set "3". This is the 4-area of the receiving word device. 3 0-4
definition 0: do not receive every time 1:I3 2:I3,I4 3:I3,I4,I5 4:I3 to I6
4 Transmission (long) Set "3". This is the 3-area of the transmission long word device. Condition32 3 0-3
Area definition 0: do not send every time 1:O1 2:O1,O2 3:O1,O2,O3
5 Transmission (word) Set "6". This is the 6-area of the transmission word device. 6 0-6
Area definition 0: do not send every time 1:O4 2:O4,O5 3:O4 to O6
4:O4 to O7 5:O4 to O8 6:O4 to O9
6
81 Receiving allocation bit device
1 Receiving bit device1 Set the device of receiving allocation bit. bit A 0 0 - 9999
2 Receiving bit device2 (buffer address: 0163) bit B 0 0 - 9999
3 Receiving bit device3 bit C 0 0 - 9999
0: do not use Condition32
4 Receiving bit device4 bit D 0 0 - 9999
5 Receiving bit device5 bit E 0 0 - 9999
6 Receiving bit device6 bit F 0 0 - 9999
82 Transmission bit device
1 Transmission bit device1 Set the device of transmission allocation bit. bit A 0 0 - 9999
2 Transmission bit device2 (buffer address: 00E3) bit B 0 0 - 9999
3 Transmission bit device3 bit C 0 0 - 9999
Condition32
4 Transmission bit device4 0: do not use bit D 0 0 - 9999
5 Transmission bit device5 bit E 0 0 - 9999
6 Transmission bit device6 bit F 0 0 - 9999
83 Receiving word device1 default name value
1 Receiving word device1 Set the receiving word device I1 to I6. I1: not used 0 0 - 9999
2 Receiving word device2 On the right are the default name values. I2: not used 0 0 - 9999
3 Receiving word device3 I3: external independent 1728 0 - 9999
0: do not use Condition32
4 Receiving word device4 I4: external ratio 01729 0 - 9999
5 Receiving word device5 I5: external moisture 0367 0 - 9999
6 Receiving word device6 I6: not used 0 0 - 9999
Condition32: Displayed only when the Address 80-1 (Operation setting) is set to 2.

84 Receiving word device2 default name value Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 Receiving word device7 Define the receiving word device of I7 to I8. I7: not used 0 0 - 9999
Condition32
2 Receiving word device8 0: Do not use I8: not used 0 0 - 9999
3 0 - 9999
4 0 - 9999
5 0 - 9999
6 0 - 9999
85 Transmission word device1 default name value
1 Transmission word device1 Define the transmitting word device of O1 to O6. O1: totalized value 0101 0 - 9999
2 Transmission word device2 On the right are the initial name values. O2: feed rate 0100 0 - 9999
3 Transmission word device3 O3: target feed rate 1010 0 - 9999
0: Do not use Condition32
4 Transmission word device4 O4: load rate 9500 0 - 9999
5 Transmission word device5 O5: speed 9501 0 - 9999
6 Transmission word device6 O6: control output 1006 0 - 9999
86 Transmission word device2 default name value
1 Transmission word device7 Define the transmitting word device. O7: external independent 0 0 - 9999
2 Transmission word device8 On the right are the initial name values. O8: external ratio Condition32 0 0 - 9999
3 Transmission word device9 0: Do not use O9: external moisture 0 0 - 9999
4
5
6

Maintenance
96 AD Conversion Condition Default Setting Range Setting Value
1 AD Self Diagnosis Select from the following: 1 0-1
Note8) 0: use the safety barrier of the load cell
1: perform the self diagnosis of the AD converter when the power source is turned on
98 Production Information
1 Program Version (u) The program version number. The modification of this parameter is disabled. 0 Disabled Disabled
2 Control Number (u) Set the control number of the device when it is necessary for management. 0 0 - 999999
3 Serial Number The serial number of the device. 0 0 - 999999
4
5
6
99 Variant
1 Permission Level Set the permission level of operation. Note8) 1 0-1
0: user level 1: administrator level
2 Write Permission Set the write permission during the operation. Note8) 2 1-2
1: browse 2: browse and write
3 Temperature To enable temperature compensation, set to 1, If not, set to 0 0 0
compensation
4 AD self-diagnosis To enable AD self-diagnosis, set to 1. If not, set to 0. The setting becomes 0 every time the power 1 0–1
source is turned ON. Note9)
5 Language Language of message line changes .0: Japanese(katakana) 1:English 0 0–1
6 Operator Select the operator to use. To fix the setting, the power source has to be turned OFF once before 2 0-4
use. Note9)
Note8) it is possible to lock the operation menu by changing the permission level. (○ = Applicable, × = Inapplicable). Note that the settings of addresses 99-1 and 99-2 will be only enabled when the the
address 99-1 is set to “0: user level”.
address 99-1 address 99-2 Weighing setting Address setting Adjustments Tests Printing Initialize Time Error history
[SET] [1] [SET] [3] [SET] [4] [SET] [5] [SET] [6] [SET] [7] [SET] [8] [SET] [9]
user browse ○ ○ × × × × × ×
browse & write ○ ○ × × × × × ×
administrator browse ○ ○ × × ○ × × ○
browse & write ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Note9) 0: conveyor scale (A)
The flow rate and the totalized value of the weighing material fed on the conveyor are measured with the load cells and the speed detector set on the conveyor.
1: reclaimer type conveyor scale (B)
The flow rate and the totalized value are measured with accuracy by compensating the error due to the inclination of the conveyor. The compensation is performed with a detector checking the
angle of the conveyor used by the reclaimer and the stacker.
2: constant feed weigher (C)
The speed of the conveyor is controlled so that the weighed flow rate is the same as the value set as the flow rate.
3: 2-stage capacity changeover type constant feed weigher (D)
This operator is used for the constant feed weigher having the function to switch its capacity in two stages to allow controlling in a wide range.
4: converter (D)
This operator converts the output of the load cells to 4-20mA.

Data Number
Bit Device
Data Data no Input Output Data Data no Input Output Data Data no Input Output
Z-operation Changeover 0311 o x Speed upper limit 0335 x o Control output hold 1721 o x
S-operation Changeover 0312 o x Adjustment operation 0336 x o Automatic operation command 1722 o x
Adjustment start 0315 o x W-operation 0337 x o Automatic operation 1730 x o
Compensation command 0316 o x Lower check weight 0338 x o Control output zero 1731 x o
External selection 0317 o x Weighing 0339 x o Deviation alarm1 1732 x o
Totalizer value reset 0321 o x Calibrating 0340 x o Deviation alarm2 1733 x o
Reset preset counter 0323 o x Alarm 0341 x o Setting value lower limit 1734 x o
Operation stop 0326 o x Compensation completion 0342 x o Setting value upper limit 1735 x o
Setting value hold 0327 o x Load rate upper/lower limit 0343 x o Setting value upper/lower limit 1736 x o
Check weight zero position 0328 o x Feed rate upper/lower limit 0344 x o OR output1 9050 x o
Operate check weight 0329 o x Speed upper/lower limit 0345 x o OR output2 9051 x o
Load rate lower limit 0330 x o Preset counter output 0346 x o OR output3 9052 x o
Load rate upper limit 0331 x o External selection 0347 x o System ready 9510 x o
Feed rate lower limit 0332 x o Low speed command 0348 o x CPU normal 9511 x o
Feed rate upper limit 0333 x o Low speed operation 0360 x o Key operation inhibit 9530 o x
Speed lower limit 0334 x o Deviation reset 1720 o x
Bit Device
Data Data no Input Output Description Data Data no Input Output Description
Load rate with limiter 0338 x o 10000 when load rate is 100% Moisture 0394 x o 10000 when moisture is 100%
Totalizer 0361 x o display value Ratio 0396 x o 10000 when ratio is 100%
Speed 0362 x o display value (Hz) External independent 1727 o o 10000 at maximum capacity
Speed rate 0363 x o 10000 when = to rated frequency External independent 1728 o o display value
Load rate 0364 x o 10000 when load rate is 100% External ratio 1729 o o 10000 when = to ratio reference
Feed rate without average 0365 x o 10000 at maximum capacity External independent (weight) 1750 o x used to set pulse string
External moisture 0367 o o 10000 when moisture is 100% Control output 1792 x o 100 when control output is 100%
External moisture (reverse) 0376 o o 10000 when moisture is 0 % Deviation amount 1793 x o display value
Feed rate (high reference) 0382 x o 10000 when high op is max capacity Control output 1799 x o 10000 when control output is 100%
Load rate 0383 x o 10000 when load rate is 100% Error code 9500 x o error display
Feed rate 0384 x o 10000 at maximum capacity Error auxiliary code 9501 x o error auxiliary display
Feed rate 0386 x o display value
Update time feed rate 0389 x o 10000 at maximum capacity
Target feed rate 0392 x o display value

ANNEX 2 - PRINTING FORMAT SETTING TABLE CFC-201
Annex 2 - PRINTING FORMAT SETTING TABLE
Below is the list to set the printing format with [SET] [6] [1].
INDIVIDUAL PRINTING
Address No. Item Default Setting Value
1 Line feed after Title printing *2) 1
2 Line feed after Individual printing *3) 0
3 Weight unit *4) 1
00
4
5
6
1 Data 1 00000
2 Data 2 00000
3 Data 3 00000
01 Line 1
4 Data 1 Printing Place 1
1 Data 1 00000
2 Data 2 00000
3 Title Data 3 00000
02 Line 2
4 Printing*1) Data 1 Printing Place 1
1 Data 1 00000
2 Data 2 00000
3 Data 3 00000
03 Line 3
1 Data 1 01025
2 Data 2 00103
3 Data 3 00000
04 Line 1
1 Data 1 00000
2 Data 2 00000
3 Individual Data 3 00000
05 Line 2
4 Printing Data 1 Printing Place 1
1 Data 1 00000
2 Data 2 00000
3 Data 3 00000
06 Line 3
Note: *1) The title printing is performed when the title printing command has been input.
*2) Used to set the number of line feeds after the title printing.
*3) Used to set the number of line feeds after individual printing.
*4) Used to select whether to add or not the weight unit. 0: do not add 1: add.

SUB-TOTAL PRINTING
1 Line feed before printing *5) 1
2 Line feed after printing *6) 1
3 Weight unit *4) 1
10
4
5
6
1 Data 1 10231
2 Data 2 01023
3 Data 3 00000
11 Line 1
1 Data 1 00000
2 Data 2 00000
3 Sub-total Data 3 00000
12 Line 2
1 Data 1 00000
2 Data 2 00000
3 Data 3 00000
13 Line 3
TOTAL PRINTING
3 Weight unit *4) 1
20
4
5
6
1 Data 1 10241
2 Data 2 01024
3 Data 3 00000
21 Line 1
1 Data 1 00000
2 Data 2 00000
3 Total Data 3 00000
22 Line 2
1 Data 1 00000
2 Data 2 00000
3 Data 3 00000
23 Line 3
Note: *5) Used to set the Line feed before printing.
*6) Used to set the Line feed after printing.

STATUS PRINTING
3 Weight unit *4) 1
30
4
5
6
1 Data 1 02200
2 Data 2 02201
3 Data 3 00000
31 Line 1
1 Data 1 10061
2 Data 2 01006
3 Data 3 00000
32 Line 2
1 Data 1 10171
2 Data 2 01017
3 Data 3 00000
33 Line 3
1 Data 1 10101
2 Data 2 01010
3 Data 3 00000
34 Line 4
1 Data 1 10161
2 Data 2 01016
3 Status Data 3 00000
35 Line 5
1 Data 1 10181
2 Data 2 01018
3 Data 3 00000
36 Line 6
1 Data 1 10191
2 Data 2 01019
3 Data 3 00000
37 Line 7
1 Data 1 10112
2 Data 2 01011
3 Data 3 00000
38 Line 8
1 Data 1 10151
2 Data 2 001015
3 Data 3 00000
39 Line 9

LOT NO.
1 Lot No. 1 for printing 00000000
2 Lot No. 2 for printing 00000000
3 Lot No. 3 for printing *7) 00000000
40
4
5
6
1 Lot No. 4 for printing *8) 00000000
2 Lot No. 4 Digit number *9) 6
3
41
4
5
6
Note: *7) Two digits represent one character.

Set the numeric characters within 00 to 09.
Set the alphabetical characters from A to Z with 10 to 35.
To set space, use 49.
This lot numbers can be printed with the setting value 5090.
*8) Used to set the lot numbers composed only with numeric characters. This lot number
can be printed with the setting value 5093.
*9) Set the number of digits when the lot number is set with numeric characters.

ANNEX 3 - ERROR CODE & TROUBLE SHOOTING CFC-201
Annex 3 - ERROR CODE & TROUBLE SHOOTING
00 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO WEIGHT DETECTOR

Problem and System
Alarm Error
XX Possible Cause Recommended Action ready
Error Message output OFF history
Low LC exciting An exciting voltage error

voltage has been detected. The
01 Please contact us. --- Yes Yes
internal power supply could
EXCITE VLT be in trouble.
The load cell could be in Check the load cell wiring.
LC wiring problem trouble such as wire Turn off the power and turn
02 breaking, over load, or it on again. If the trouble is --- Yes Yes
WIRING ERR problem of the load cell not removed, please contact
itself. us.
The load cell could be in Check the load cell wiring.
Excess input from trouble such as wire Turn off the power and turn
03 LC breaking, over load, or it on again. If the trouble is --- Yes Yes
INPUT OVER problem of the load cell not removed, please contact
itself. us.
Check the load cell wiring.
AD converter output Turn off the power and turn
has problem AD converter without being
04 it on again. If the trouble is --- Yes Yes
acting normally.
AD-CONV not removed, please contact
us.
Check the load cell wiring.
Remarkable difference is
Excess AD deviation found between AD Turn off the power and turn
10 it on again. If the trouble is --- Yes Yes
DIF BET AD deviation at self-diagnosis
not removed, please contact
and in weighing output.
us.
Turn off the power and turn
Excess offset Excess offset is found at
it on again. If the trouble is
11 self-diagnosis. Weighing --- Yes Yes
OFFSET ERR not removed, please contact
amp is possibly in trouble.
us.
Turn off the power and turn
Span error Span error is found at
it on again. If the trouble is
12 self-diagnosis. Weighing --- Yes Yes
SPAN ERROR not removed, please contact
amp is possibly in trouble.
us.
03 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO THE OPERATOR

Problem and System
Alarm Error
Check the conveyor.
Range exceeded The adjustment did not
Perform the initial
12 succeed due to the excess --- --- Yes
ADJUSTFAIL adjustment if the conveyor
of the range of adjustment.
is normal.
Insufficient input The span adjustment is not Adjust again after checking
13 allowed from the output of the weight and the settings --- --- Yes
INPUT LACK the actual load cell. of the test chain.
The load on the conveyor is
Load rate upper limit above the alarm value. The
alarm Check the load on the
50 error will only be recorded --- --- Yes
conveyor.
LoadUpper to the error history without
being displayed.
The load on the conveyor is
Load rate lower limit below the alarm value. The
alarm Check the load on the
51 error will only be recorded --- --- Yes
conveyor.
LoadLower to the error history without
being displayed.
The feed rate is above the
Feed rate upper limit alarm value. The error will Check the load on the
55 alarm only be recorded to the conveyor and the speed of --- --- Yes
FeedUpper error history without being the belt.
displayed.

03 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO THE OPERATOR
Problem and System
Alarm Error
The feed rate is below the
Feed rate lower limit alarm value. The error will Check the load on the
56 alarm only be recorded to the conveyor and the speed of --- --- Yes
FeedLower error history without being the belt.
displayed.
The speed of the conveyor
Speed upper limit is above the alarm value.
60 alarm The error will only be Check the speed of the belt. --- --- Yes
SpeedUpper recorded to the error history
without being displayed.
The speed of the conveyor
Speed lower limit is below the alarm value.
61 alarm The error will only be Check the speed of the belt. --- --- Yes
SpeedLower recorded to the error history
Lower check weight The check weight has been
error lowered during the Check if the control of the
70 --- --- Yes
operation that is not check weight is available.
CheckWeigt S-operation.
Deviation error of An external deviation alarm
load cells Check the right and left load
80 of load cells has been input --- --- Yes
cells.
DifBetCell and an error occurred.
Volumetric switch An external volumetric Check the external
81 command switch command has been volumetric switch --- --- Yes
VolInput input. command.
Weight volumetric The operation has been
Check the error history to
82 switched to volumetric due --- --- Yes
AdVolumet the contents of error.
to weighing error.
The speed has been
Speed shutout shutout during the control
83 output when the operation Check the speed signal. --- --- Yes
SpeedInCut is executed due to speed
error.
Speed volumetric The operation has been
84 switched to speed Check the speed signal. --- --- Yes
SpeedVol volumetric.
17 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO THE CONTROL STATUS

Problem and System
Alarm Error
The deviation is exceeding
Deviation upper the deviation alarm1 value.
50 alarm1 The error will only be Check the control status. --- --- Yes
DevUpper1 recorded to the error history
The deviation is below the
Deviation lower deviation alarm1 value. The
51 alarm1 error will only be recorded Check the control status. --- --- Yes
DevLower1 to the error history without
being displayed.
The deviation is exceeding
Deviation upper the deviation alarm2 value.
52 alarm2 The error will only be Check the control status. --- --- Yes
DevUpper2 recorded to the error history
The deviation is below the
Deviation lower deviation alarm2 value. The
53 alarm2 error will only be recorded Check the control status. --- --- Yes
DevLower2 to the error history without
being displayed.

17 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO THE CONTROL STATUS
Problem and System
Alarm Error
The setting value is
Setting value upper exceeding the maximum
alarm capacity. The error will only
55 Check the setting values. --- --- Yes
be recorded to the error
SetUpper history without being
displayed.
The setting value is below
Setting value lower the minimum feed rate
alarm setting. The error will only
56 Check the setting values. --- --- Yes
be recorded to the error
SetLower history without being
displayed.
20 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO THE SETTING VALUES (*Note)

Problem and System
Alarm Error
Confirm the available
Setting range error The value set has exceeded setting range of the Address
20 the range of the available Setting shown by the --- --- ---
D RANGE E setting range. auxiliary number, and input
the setting value again.
Parity error Set again the setting value
The internal data is
21 of the address shown by the --- --- Yes
M PARITY E corrupted.
auxiliary number.
Setting range error The value stored as setting Set again the setting value
22 value is exceeding its of the address shown by the --- --- Yes
RANGE OVER range. auxiliary number.
Whole setting value All the settings have been
Set again the setting value
initialized initialized due to the
24 of the data shown by the --- --- Yes
corruption of all the setting
ALL INIT the error class code.
values.
Unauthorized
modifying The setting value has been Set the authority before
25 --- --- ---
modified without authority. modifying the settings.
ACCESS L E
Note: The error class code is used to determine which data has troubles.
0: RAM protected from power failure 1: Internal setting of the address settings
2: Printing format 3: Error history data setting (initialize the error history)
4: Contact us 5: Contact us
21 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO EEROM

Problem and System
Alarm Error
EEROM writing error Writing in EEROM has not Modify the data. Please
10 been succeeded. The contact us if the same --- Yes Yes
EEROM ERR EEROM could be damaged. trouble occurs.
Writing in EEROM has not
EEROM busy signal been succeeded because Modify the data again.
11 on the EEROM is busy with Please contact us if the --- Yes Yes
BUSY ON continued writing. The same trouble occurs.
EEROM could be damaged.

22 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO CLOCK
Problem and System
Alarm Error
Time modify error There is an error to the Check again the range of
10 parameter of the time the date and time and set --- --- ---
CHANGE ERR setting. again.
Trouble of internal Modify the time again.
clock There is an error in the IO
11 Please contact us if the --- Yes Yes
of the time.
CLOCK ERR same trouble occurs.
26 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO ANGLE METER

Problem and System
Alarm Error
The angle settings from the
address 21-1 to 22-4 have
Angle setting value to be set in the ascending
error The angle settings are not order. If it is during the
02 --- --- ---
in the ascending order. adjustment, perform the
ANGLECHECK adjustment by setting a
small value to the angle
setting not yet adjusted.
31 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO PARALLEL INPUT/OUTPUT

Problem and System
Alarm Error
The setting of the address First set 0 to the address
Status setting error 71-1 is not 0 when the 71-1 before modifying the
10 --- --- ---
STATUS SET address 71-5 has been address 71-5. And then set
modified. the address 71-1 again.
40 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO SERIAL INPUT/OUTPUT

Problem and System
Alarm Error
Select the interface of
The selected interface of
Allocation error another port, or set the
the serial communication is
00 interface of the port actually --- --- Yes
ALLCTN E already allocated to another
using to the unused status
port.
before changing the port.
An overrun has occurred at Set a lower baud rate.
Overrun at serial
port the serial port because the
01 --- --- Yes
communication speed was
OVERRUN too high.
A parity error has been
Parity error The parity setting (even,
found at the serial port
02 odd, or no parity) could be --- --- Yes
PARITY ERR shown by the auxiliary error
wrong. Set the parity again.
code.
Framing error has been The stop bit setting (1 stop
Framing error found at the serial port bit or 2 stop bits) could be
03 --- --- Yes
FRAMING E shown by the auxiliary error wrong. Set the stop bit
code. again.
Time-out has occurred
Check if there is no wrong
Time-out error because no data has been
wiring or problem in
11 received at the serial port --- --- Yes
TIME-OUT E software of the destination
shown by the auxiliary error
device.
code.

50 - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO PRINTING
Problem and System
Alarm Error
Printing The printing command was Input the printing command
00 --- --- ---
PRINTING input during printing. after completion of printing.
6X - XX TROUBLES RELATED TO THE COMMUNICATION WITH THE SEQUENCER

Problem and System
Alarm Error
X-XX Possible Cause Recommended Action ready
The checksum of the text
Checksum error received from the Check if the applied baud
0 - 01 --- --- Yes
CHECKSUM E sequencer is not consistent rate is correct.
in format.
The ID number set to the
ID number error Check if the ID number
address setting does not
0 - 02 setting of the sequencer is --- --- Yes
ID No. ERR correspond to the number
correct.
set to the CPU link unit.
The format of the text
Format error received from the
Check if the setting of the
0 - 04 sequencer does not --- --- Yes
FORMAT ERR sequencer is correct.
correspond to the defined
one.
The byte size of the text
Received byte size received from the
error Check if the setting of the
0 - 06 sequencer does not --- --- Yes
sequencer is correct.
SIZE ERROR correspond to the
requested one.
The bus configuration
Select signal off select signal turned off
Check if the sequence is
0 - 30 during communication when --- --- Yes
SELECT OFF correct.
the sequencer is connected
with bus configuration.
1 - 00 MITSUBISHI link Refer to the manual of
unit communication NAK is received from the
MITSUBISHI link-unit
to error sequencer when MELSEC --- --- Yes
referring to the error code
1 - 41 is used.
MITSUBISHI displayed in 2 digits (- XX).
The ending code for Refer to the manual of the
2 - 00 OMRON link-unit returned with the responded upper link module referring
to error frame from the sequencer is to the ending code in 2 --- --- Yes
2 - 88 OMRON ERR not proper (00) when digits (-XX). The ending
SYSMAC is used. code AX is displayed as 8X.

65- XX TROUBLES RELATED TO CC-LINK
Problem and System
Alarm Error
Station ID no. switch There is an error to the Set the station ID number
00 setting error setting of the station ID switch within the range of 1 --- --- Yes
AREA NO SW number switch. to 61.
Baud rate switch There is an error to the
Set the Baud rate switch
01 setting error setting of the Baud rate --- --- Yes
within the range of 0 to 4.
BAURATE SW switch.
The station ID number
The station ID number
Station ID no. switch switch has been changed
switch setting has been
02 change error during the operation, or --- --- Yes
changed during the
AREA SW CG there is an error to the
operation.
station ID number switch.
The Baud rate switch has
Baud rate switch
The Baud rate switch has been changed during the
change
03 been changed during the operation, or there is an --- --- Yes
error
operation. error to the Baud rate
BAU SW CG
switch.
Check the wiring.
The CRC error occurred
CRC error Check the connection
10 continuously for over 10 --- --- Yes
CRC ERROR (setting) of the terminal
seconds.
resistor.
Check the following settings
of the main device: the
There were no response
Time-over error wiring, the status, the
11 from the main device --- --- Yes
TIME OVER station ID number, the Baud
(during 5sec) and time-out.
rate switch, the terminal
resistor, etc.

9X - XX TROUBLE RELATED TO OTHER UNITS
Problem and System
Alarm Error
X-XX Possible Cause Recommended Action ready
No data A disabled data has been Check the data number and
0 - 20 Yes
NO D LABEL tried to modify. set again.
Error history error There is an error in the area The error history will be
4 - 11
ER INIT ZE of the error history. automatically initialized.
Low battery voltage The backup battery voltage Replace the battery. Please
7 - 10 --- --- Yes
LOW BATT V reduction occurred. contact us.
8 - 00
System reset A software reset has The system will recover
to --- --- Yes
RESET FFXX occurred. automatically.
8 - 17
This message is displayed
This is only a status
to record the date and time
8 - 50 POWER ON message. There is no error --- --- Yes
when the power is on in the
to the device.
error history.
This message is displayed
Start operation to record the date and time This is only a status
9 - 00 when the key operation message. There is no error --- --- Yes
OPERATION started and ended in the to the device.
error history.
Key operation not
allowed The key operation is not This is not an error of the
9 - 01 --- --- ---
allowed. device.
NO KEY OP
An operation or modification
of data restricted by the
Operation mode operation mode was
restriction Check the operation level or
9 - 02 performed, or the write --- --- ---
the attribute requirements.
OP LEVEL process to an attribute with
write protection was
attempted.
The adjustment was
Operation not attempted when the weight
This operation is not
allowed adjustment switch disabled
9 - 03 allowed under the condition --- --- ---
it, or the AD self-diagnosis
NO OPERATN written on the left column.
has been attempted during
the feeding.

ANNEX 4 - INPUT/OUTPUT CONNECTORS CFC-201
Annex 4 - INPUT/OUTPUT CONNECTORS
1. Load Cell Connector, CON1
SIGNAL PIN No. CABLE COLOR

2 1 Black
3S 2 Brown
3 3 White
5 4 Red
4 5 Green
4S 6 Yellow
(NC) 7 —
SE 8 Shielded
2. Power Supply
AC 85 to 264 V
L
N
PE
3. Serial Input/Output, CN2
DEDICATED CABLE
SIGNAL FUNCTION Pin No.
PE Frame Earth 1 Blue Red - 1
TX0 Serial 1, Sending Data 2 Blue Black - 1
RX0 Serial 1, Receiving Data 3 Pink Red - 1
RTS0 Serial 1, Sending Request 4 Pink Black - 1
CTS0 Serial 1, Ready for Receiving 5 Green Red - 1
GND Earth for Signal (common) 6 Green Black - 1
TX2 Serial 3, Sending Data 7 Orange Red - 1
GND Earth for Signal (common) 8 Not Used
RX2 Serial 3, Receiving Data 9 Gray Red - 1
SEL RS232C/RS422 Selection 10 Not Used
TX1 Serial 2, Sending Data 11 Blue Red - 2
RX1 Serial 2, Receiving Data 12 Blue Black - 2
TD + RS422 Sending Data 13 Pink Red - 2
TD - RS422 Sending Data 14 Pink Black - 2
RD + RS422 Receiving Data 15 Green Red - 2
RD - RS422 Receiving Data 16 Green Black - 2
GND Earth for Signal (common) 17 Orange Red - 2
EN (not used) 18 Orange Black - 2
GND Earth for Signal 19 Gray Red - 2
P5 (not used) 20 Gray Black - 2

4. Control Input/Output, CN3
DEDICATED CABLE
IN 1 Operation stop 1 Blue Red - 1
IN 2 External selection 2 Blue Black - 1
IN 3 Totalizer value reset 3 Pink Red - 1
IN 4 Check weight zero position 4 Pink Black - 1
IN 5 Deviation reset 5 Green Red - 1
IN 6 Setting value hold 6 Green Black - 1
IN 7 Automatic operation command 7 Orange Red - 1
IN 8 Control output hold 8 Orange Black - 1
COM Common 9 Gray Red - 1
COM Common 10 Gray Black - 1
OUT 1 System ready 15 Green Red - 2
OUT 2 Weighing 16 Green Black - 2
OUT 3 W-operation 17 Orange Red - 2
OUT 4 Calibrating 18 Orange Black - 2
OUT 5 Adjustment operation 19 Gray Red - 2
OUT 6 Automatic operation 20 Gray Black - 2
OUT 7 Compensation completion 21 Blue Red - 3
OUT 8 External selection 22 Blue Black -3
OUT 9 Deviation upper/lower limit1 11 Blue Red - 2
OUT 10 Deviation upper/lower limit2 12 Blue Black - 2
OUT 11 Setting value upper/lower limit 13 Pink Red - 2
OUT 12 Low speed operation 14 Pink Black - 2
OUT 13 Feed rate upper limit 25 Green Red - 3
OUT 14 Feed rate lower limit 26 Green Black - 3
OUT 15 CPU operating normally 27 Orange Red - 3
OUT 16 Alarm 18 Orange Black - 3
COM Common 23 Pink Red - 3
COM Common 24 Pink Black - 3

5. Analog Pulse Input/Output, F - CN1
DEDICATED CABLE
DC6 Power source 6V 20mA 28 Orange Black – 3

DC15 Power source 15V 150 14 Pink Black – 2
COM1 Control common 13 Pink Red – 2
SPI01 Speed pulse input 26 Green Black -3
COM1 Control common 25 Green Red – 3
SPI02 Setting pulse input 12 Blue Black -2
COM1 Control common 11 Blue Red – 2
FPo+ Fast pulse output (+) 24 Pink Black -3
FPo- Fast pulse output (-) 10 Gray Black -1
COM1 Control common 9 Gray Red – 1
DAV01 Analog output1 (voltage) 8 Orange Black -1
DAG01 Analog common1 7 Orange Red – 1
DAI01 Analog output1 (voltage) 6 Green Black -1
DAG01 Analog common1 5 Green Red – 1
DAI02 Analog output2 (voltage) 4 Pink Black -1
DAG02 Analog common2 3 Pink Red – 1
ADI01 Analog input (voltage) 2 Blue Black -1
ADG01 Analog common1 1 Blue Red - 1
6. Relay Output Terminal Block, F - CN2
TERMINAL SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 LPo
Slow pulse
2 LPG
3 Ry1
Lower check weight
4 RCOM1
5 Ry2 Feed rate upper/lower limit
6 Ry3 Speed upper/lower limit
7 Ry4 Load rate upper/lower limit
8 RCOM2 Common Ry2 to Ry4

7. Optional Relay Board
B-CN1
1 DAV
2 DAI Analog output, control output
3 DAG
B-CN2
1 Ry1a
2 Ry1b Weighing
3 COM1
4 Ry2a
5 Ry2b Automatic operation
6 COM2
B-CN3
1 Ry3 External selection

2 Ry4 Preset output
3 Ry5 Deviation alarm1
4 Ry6 Deviation alarm2
5 COM3 Common
8. Wiring Material
Power Supply Crimp contact 1.25-4
CON1 EJ750-60 (3 m), EJ750-70 (5 m)
CN2 ER969-50 (5 m)
CN3, F-CN1 ER968-30 (3 m), ER968-50 (5 m)

CFC-201 User's Munual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CFC-201 User's Munual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CFC-201 User's Munual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this manual?

What is the purpose of this manual?

What safety precautions are mentioned?

What safety precautions are mentioned?

CFC-201 CONTROLLER

Yamato Scale Co., Ltd.

VERSION DATE DESCRIPTION

No. 1 February 1, 2008

YAMATO SCALE CO., LTD.

Users Manual Ver. 1 -i- EJ1025AG0700A

Overseas Operation Department

Users Manual Ver. 1 - ii - EJ1025AG0700A

DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION NOTICES

RECOGNIZE SAFETY INFORMATION

WARNING 2. Maintenance and inspection work must be performed by qualified a

Users Manual Ver. 1 - iii - EJ1025AG0700A

ELECTRICAL SAFETY INFORMATION

DANGER 1. Never perform any changes of or additions to this instrument.

CAUTION NOTICES DURING INSTALLATION OR MAINTENANCE

DANGER 2. Be sure to ground the earth terminal of this instrument. Otherwise

CAUTION ABOUT DISPOSAL

1. This instrument is using a lithium battery. Before discarding the

Users Manual Ver. 1 - iv - EJ1025AG0700A

Chapter-1 MACHINE DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................... 1

Chapter-2 SETUP ........................................................................................................................ 5

Chapter-4 ERROR DISPLAY ..................................................................................................... 33

Chapter-5 OPERATION ............................................................................................................. 35

Chapter-6 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE .................................................................................. 61

Users Manual Ver. 1 -v- EJ1025AG0700A

Chapter-8 SPECIFICATION .................................................................................................... 146

Annex 1 - ADDRESS SETTING .................................................................................................. 167

Users Manual Ver. 1 - vi - EJ1025AG0700A

Chapter-1 MACHINE DESCRIPTION

Status CFC- 201

Operation mode selection key

Users Manual Ver. 1 -1- EJ1025AG0700A

(2) Keys and Switches

Clear key Clears the setting value during the input.

Enter key Enters the setting.

[F1] key Switches the setting display.

(3) Feed Rate

Users Manual Ver. 1 -2- EJ1025AG0700A

Status Message Description

(5) Monitor Display

A: Conveyor scale mode B: Reclaimer mode

C: (CFW mode) and D (2-stage changeover type CFW mode)

Regarding the Operation mode

Users Manual Ver. 1 -3- EJ1025AG0700A

1.2 Rear Panel

(1) Load cell connector CON1 OP1 OP2

(4) Serial I/O connector

(2) Power switch (6) Parallel control

(1) Load cell connector (CON1)

DANGER Be sure to ground the earth terminal. (Grounding resistance must

(4) Serial input/output connector (CN2)

Users Manual Ver. 1 -4- EJ1025AG0700A

(1) Permission Levels

(2) Self-diagnosis items

OP CLB F L S D SET OP CLB F L S D SET

Estimated end ＺＥＲＯＡＤＪ the previous value(%)

Estimated end ＺＥＲＯＡＤＪ the previous value (%)